Dell Compellent Storage Center Configuration Guide



Comments



Description

Storage Center™System Manager Version 6.3 Administrator’s Guide Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Document Number: 680-019-013 Revision Date A January 2013 Description Initial release in support of version 6.3. Notes, Cautions, and Warnings Note: Indicates important information that helps you complete a procedure. Caution: Indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. Warning: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright Notice and Trademarks © 2013 Dell Inc. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the Dell logo, and Compellent™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Contacting Dell Technical Support Services For technical support, go to support.dell.com/compellent/. Contents 1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Requirements for System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Starting Storage Center System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Respond to Startup Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 View the System Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Storage Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 System Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Next Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Manage Unmanaged Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Change the Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Create Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Configure User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Create Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Apply Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Review Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Create Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Monitor Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Monitor Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Volume Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View General Properties for all Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Properties for Specific Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Multiple Volumes for a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 13 14 14 15 16 17 17 17 17 21 22 24 25 26 iii Contents Remove Mappings from a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select a Logical Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict Mapping Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Multipathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Read-Only Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Mapping to Down Server Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Boot from SAN Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Space Consumption Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Replays to Coalesce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset VMS Unique Disk ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Cache Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a Deleted Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empty the Recycle Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expand a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Notes to a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Volume Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Volumes to a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Copy, Mirror, and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Migrate a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volumes or Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Replay Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv 26 27 27 28 30 30 30 31 31 33 34 36 36 36 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 40 40 40 41 41 41 41 42 42 43 44 45 45 47 47 47 47 48 48 50 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 60 60 61 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Contents Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a One-time Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Daily Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Weekly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a Monthly Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Replays Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Individual Replay Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profile Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Profiles Attached to a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Volume Maximums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Immediate Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resume Replays for an Individual Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Volume Replay Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Volume Replay Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a View Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Volumes from Consistency Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replay Profile General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replay Profile Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing from an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New QoS Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit QoS Definition Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Limit Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Definition Replications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Definition Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 62 63 65 67 67 67 68 69 69 69 70 70 71 72 72 72 72 72 73 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 77 77 78 79 79 81 81 83 83 84 85 86 88 90 95 95 96 97 98 98 99 100 101 102 v Contents QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 5 Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Server Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Operating System of a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Mappings from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server for a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Server to Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Server from Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Server to a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Promote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demote Server Cluster Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Server Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Virtual Host Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Server Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Servers to a Server Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Servers to a Different Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing HBAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add HBAs to a Server from a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Define an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove HBAs from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete an HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Server Connectivity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Information General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server HBAs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Connectivity Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Mapping Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Volumes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Server Charts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi 106 106 106 107 108 108 108 109 109 110 110 113 113 114 114 115 115 118 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 124 125 126 126 127 127 127 127 128 128 129 130 131 131 132 133 134 134 135 135 136 137 138 139 140 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Contents 6 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Setting Controller Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Controller Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Controller Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Controller Performance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Back of a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Port General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View FC IO Card Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set FC IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Preferred Physical Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Control Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Advanced iSCSI Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View iSCSI Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the iSCSI Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset IO Card User Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the iSCSI Card Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Digest Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Window Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Timeout Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable VLAN Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS Port Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View SAS IO Card Performance Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Remote iSCSI Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Remote CHAP Initiators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Remote CHAP Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 142 142 142 142 143 144 145 145 146 147 147 149 150 151 153 153 154 155 155 157 158 159 159 160 161 161 161 162 162 162 163 163 163 164 164 164 165 166 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 172 173 173 174 174 174 174 vii . . . . . . . Change the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . Delete a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule a RAID Rebalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Rebalance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Disk Folder . . . . . . . . . . Identify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii 194 194 194 195 195 196 198 200 201 202 202 202 203 204 205 205 206 206 207 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 212 212 213 214 214 214 215 Storage Center 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Profiles for SSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release a Managed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Tiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change CHAP Authentication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller CPU PerformanceTab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Usage Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . Alert for Disk with Single Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revert a Released Disk to Managed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan a Hardware Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign a New Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager . Modify Tier Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 180 180 180 181 181 182 182 183 184 185 186 186 188 188 189 190 191 7 Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Disk Folder . . . . . Storage Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAID Rebalance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller IP Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Info Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a RAID Rebalance Schedule . . Rebalancing RAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Storage Profile Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Back Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a Storage Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable CHAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset Default Port Settings . . . . . . Select RAID Stripe Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Date and Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set System Cache . . . . . . . Set the System Management IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 215 216 216 216 217 217 218 218 218 219 219 220 220 222 223 8 System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Unassigned Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Phone Home Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Current Local Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Modifying System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disk Enclosure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User-Created Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Login Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert to Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . Phone Home Immediately . . . Create a New Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Determine if Data Progression is Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Disk Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename the Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure iSNS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 226 226 227 228 229 229 230 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 240 242 242 243 243 244 244 245 245 247 248 250 251 252 253 254 255 ix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Optional Information about Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile . . . . . . . . . Delete a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Data Progression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Global Disk Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the Phone Home Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure iSCSI IO Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Submit a License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Fault Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Syslog Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledged Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Download an Available Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create IP Filter for Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Storage Consumption Trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Add iSCSI Remote Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 256 257 258 259 261 261 262 262 263 263 263 263 265 266 266 268 270 270 271 272 273 274 274 275 275 276 276 276 276 277 277 279 280 282 283 283 284 284 284 284 285 285 285 286 286 287 288 289 290 290 291 292 293 294 Storage Center 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Cache Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Update Package Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . View Data Progression Pressure Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Access Violations . Decide How to Apply Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check for an Update Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Components . . . . . . Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Data Progression Tab . . Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate a New SSL Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure a Secure Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn on Enclosures . . . . . . System Properties General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn on Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure the SNMP Server . . . . . . . . . . Finish Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify an IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Available Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View the System Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Automatic Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Disk Sparing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alert Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Volume Distribution Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Properties Storage Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Storage Center . . Restart Secure Console Access . Disable Secure Console Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset the License Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding More Information About an Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Directory User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a folder from a User Group . . .Contents System Properties Message Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 298 298 298 299 299 300 306 306 307 308 310 311 314 314 314 314 315 315 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 326 327 328 328 329 329 329 330 331 331 332 A Server HBA Settings . . . . . . 295 System Properties Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cisco Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . User Privilege Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Default Volume Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . Upgrade User Privileges . Modify User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Understanding Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User Group . . . Set the Default Server Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Directory Services Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information About an Individual User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Storage Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emulex Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set the Default Volume Size . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Access for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Local User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename a User Group . . . . . . . 296 9 Users and User Groups . . . Choosing an Account Management Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Mapping Volume Defaults . . . . . . . Grant Access to a Directory User . . . . . . Set Replay Volume Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information About All Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downgrade User Privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Account Management and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a Folder to a User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove a User Group From a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grant Access to a Directory User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . Delete a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a New User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disable a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 335 335 336 336 xi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Local User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add a User Group to a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IBM AIX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VMWare Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . SuSE Linux SLES . . Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver . . . . . . . Configuring a Liebert™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 345 345 345 346 347 C UPS User FAQ and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. . . . . . . . . . .Contents LSI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Flow Control Settings . . . Configuring an APC™ UPS . Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 352 356 356 359 D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . Ethernet Flow Control . . . 367 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 E Port Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Citrix XenServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oracle Solaris Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinitialize the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 xii Storage Center 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Qlogic iSCSI Cards . . . . . . 338 339 340 341 341 341 341 342 342 342 343 343 343 B iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Introduction . Settings by Server Operating System . . . . . . . Novell Netware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . Jumbo Frames and Flow Control . . . . . 349 UPS User FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP-UX Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Ports and Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Getting Started This section provides an overview of Storage Center System Manager and identifies the steps to get started. . . 5 Next Steps . . . . • Display the status of hardware components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To view currently licensed applications. . . . . . . . • Phone Home information to Dell Technical Support Services. . . . . . 2 Navigating the Interface . . . . . disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview Storage Center System Manager provides a central management interface to create and manage Storage Center volumes. . . In addition to the System Manager. . . . . . . . Dell Compellent 1 . . . servers. . Contents Starting Storage Center System Manager . Note: Figures in this document show views. . and options displayed when logged in with Admin privileges. . • Manage local backup and restore. select Licensed Features from the Help menu. . • Set up users and access privileges. . Use System Manager to: • Provision volumes and map them to servers. Storage Center provides a rich set of separately licensed applications that support dynamic storage. . . . . . . . . . . and users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . menus. . . . . . . . . . Users logged in as Volume Manager or Reporter will see only the options that their privileges allow. . . . . . 2 Click Yes or Continue to acknowledge the messages and alerts.Chapter 1 Getting Started Requirements for System Manager Storage Center System Manager is a Java applet that requires the use of a Java plugin to run. enter the name or IP address of the management controller.0. open the Java Control Panel and make sure that the option Enable Java content in the browser is selected . The minimum software requirements for running System Manager are given below. Mozilla Firefox 3. If you are using IPv6 addressing. 8. The Storage Center System Manager logon dialog box appears. and 9 • Windows Internet Explorer Desktop version 10 (Internet Explorer Modern version 10 is not supported) • Mozilla Firefox on Microsoft Windows Note: Other web browsers may work but are not officially supported. After logging in. you must set the IPv6 address and IPv6 Prefix in the controller properties. Log on to System Manager Follow these steps to log on to System Manager. and Java 6. Java • Java version 6 or later • When using Java 7.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 Storage Center 6. Component Requirements Web browser • Windows Internet Explorer versions 7. for initial login use the IPv4 address of the management controller. 1 In the address bar of the Web browser. Note: Storage Center System Manager cannot load with the following unique combination of applications: Windows 2008 (64-bit). Starting Storage Center System Manager Access Storage Center System Manager from a workstation or computer on the same network as the Storage Center controller. See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142 Respond to Startup Messages Messages about ports or hardware may appear upon system startup that require action. it prompts you to manage them. IO Card Change Detected If an IO card change is detected on system startup. click Yes and Run to continue. such as disks or server host bus adaptors (HBAs). ports can become unbalanced. • Balance unbalanced ports: In the message dialog box. enter the default password: mmm 5 Click Login. If local ports are unbalanced.Starting Storage Center System Manager 3 In the User field. enter the default administrator user name: Admin 4 Enter the administrative password for Storage Center. Note: The End User License Agreement is displayed the first time a new user logs on to Storage Center. Storage Center automatically launches the IO Card Change wizard. c Uncheck the option to check for unbalanced local ports at startup. See Also Managing IO Card Changes on page 181 Unmanaged Hardware If the System Manager finds unmanaged hardware. click Yes to rebalance local ports. See Also Managing Disks on page 195 Dell Compellent 3 . • Turn off the rebalance ports message: a Select the Controllers node icon in the System Tree by right clicking on it. If an additional security alert(s) appear. b From the shortcut menu. Unbalanced Local Ports If a controller has been added or taken offline. select Rebalance Local Ports. If a new password has not been set. Click Accept to continue. you are prompted to balance the ports. • The Yellow line shows the Low Space Threshold.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • The Blue line shows the amount of space used recently. If a Storage Center system has more than one disk folder. Used disk space Space used by volumes and replays (blue in the bar graph). Total disk space Amount of raw disk space available (gold in the bar graph). Free disk space Space available for volumes and replays (gray in the bar graph). This appears only if unhealthy or bad disk space has been found (black in the bar graph). Field Description Blue banner Date and time when the summary was generated. More Details Link to Online Storage view. Unhealthy/Bad Space Space (if any) found on any unhealthy disks. which contains charts that detail storage use and trends. The upper pane shows the Storage Summary in a graph and in list form. 4 • The Blue banner shows when the history was generated. Storage Center 6.Chapter 1 Getting Started View the System Dashboard The center pane of the System Explorer opens to the system dashboard with Storage Summary and Storage History displayed. the Status value changes to Space Low. Status Current status of storage utilization. When the Free disk space available falls below the Low Space Threshold (10%). or any bad space found on disks that are healthy. the System Manager displays a Storage Summary and Storage History for each disk folder. The lower pane shows Storage History in a chart that tracks disk use over time. • The Red line shows the amount of raw disk space available. Navigating the Interface Navigating the Interface This section describes the main elements of the System Manager user interface. Click the Storage Management menu to see the menus and options for viewing and configuring Storage Center. Storage Management Menu The Storage Management menu is located in the upper-left corner of the main pane. Dell Compellent 5 . Context Menu Context menu commands that apply to commands currently being used appear near the top of the System Explorer window. the window displays scroll arrows to the far right of the view tabs. Click the arrows to scroll through the open tabs. If more tabs are available than can be displayed. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7 6 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 1 Getting Started View Menu The View menu provides multiple ways to configure a system or view system properties. After a specific view is displayed. Click the arrow to display all commands shown in the shortcut menu. If there is not sufficient room to display all context menu commands at the top of the window. the tab for that view appears in the upper pane of the System Explorer window for the remainder of the current session. Click View to open the View menu. a down arrow is displayed. Options are specific to each individual view. A check box is provided to match case (default). Rightclick an item in the System Tree to view the shortcut menu for that item. Dell Compellent 7 . The arrow to the left of the search field allows you to minimize/maximize the search panel. The System Tree displays the system components of a Storage Center. Shortcut menu Context menu commands Down arrow Search Function The Search box in the lower left provides the ability to search through the System Tree for objects with matching names.Navigating the Interface System Tree Expand component folders in the System Tree to view individual components. Arrows allow you to navigate forward and backward. Shortcut Menu The shortcut menu provides easy access to specific options for the selected item. A drop-down menu allows filtering objects by type. Set Controller and System IP Address for IPv6 If you are using IPv6 addressing. See Also Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198 Change the Admin Password The default administrator password is mmm. Storage Center groups disks into a disk folder to create a pool of storage from which volumes are created. If not. See Also Change Local User Passwords on page 314 Create Servers Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard. See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142 Set the System Management IP Address on page 227 Manage Unmanaged Disks It is usually assumed that disks attached to the Storage Center controller were identified and assigned during installation. It is recommended that you change the default before Storage Center is put into production. See Also Managing Single Servers on page 110 Managing Server Clusters on page 115 Managing Virtual Servers on page 124 Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174 Configure User Volume Defaults Access to Storage Center is based on volumes and volume settings.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Storage Center recognizes unmanaged hardware and asks that you manage (assign) it. you must set the Management IP address in the Controller Properties and in the System Properties. These tasks are configuration dependent and not all tasks are required at all sites. Make sure that you set the controller IP addresses first. See Also Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults on page 319 Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324 8 Storage Center 6.Chapter 1 Getting Started Next Steps This section identifies basic tasks that you may need to perform after your first log on to Storage Center System Manager. You can also communicate with the server using iSCSI CHAP by adding remote CHAP initiators. high-capacity SAS drives. while less active blocks automatically move to lower-cost. Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. See Also About Storage Profiles on page 212 Create Users Users have access to folders. views. and you also can create replay profiles that fit specific needs. This is the most effective storage profile for typical Storage Center use. volumes. See Also Replay Profiles on page 59 Review Storage Profiles Storage Profiles determine how to move data most effectively within Storage Center. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22 Apply Replay Profiles A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). Storage Center uses Data Progression to write and move data so that the most active blocks of data remain on high-performance solid state drives (SSDs) or Fibre Channel drives. User accounts can be created locally and/ or exist externally in a directory service. you may need to create volumes to organize data and users. you may need to create or apply a different storage profile. When licensed. In either case.Next Steps Create Volumes Depending on the configuration at your site. If you are using Solid State Drives (SSDs) or are working with Dell Technical Support Services to manage data movement. By default. a storage profile is applied to each volume. See Also Users and User Groups on page 297 Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300 Managing Users on page 306 Managing User Groups on page 326 Dell Compellent 9 . you must apply a replay profile to each volume before it is included in any replay activity. System Manager provides standard replay profiles. and commands depending on their privilege level and the User Groups to which they belong. which is simply a logical grouping of physical drives. and speeds.Chapter 1 Getting Started Monitor Alerts Alerts warn you of component failure when Storage Center requires attention. capacities.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . it generates an alert. See Also Alert Indicators on page 284 Alert Categories on page 284 Alert Status on page 284 View the System Alert Monitor on page 285 Monitor Disk Drive Consumption Disk drives that are managed by Storage Center are contained in a disk folder. Disk folders can contain a mixture of drive types. The total capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the capacities of the drives within the folder. warning you to add additional space. The status of Storage Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner of the main pane. See Also Space Warnings on page 286 Conservation Mode on page 286 Emergency Mode on page 286 Adding Space on page 289 10 Storage Center 6. System Manager also displays alert information in a separate tab in the main window. As Storage Center approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder. See Also Viewing Online Storage Summary on page 277 Monitoring Storage Space on page 287 Add Space as Required Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and Replay use as needed based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. See Also View Volume Distribution Reports on page 282 Dell Compellent 11 . View Volume Statistics Volume statistics show information about disk space usage for the selected volume. with tabs that allow you to view performance and disk space usage information for the volume. Note: Volume statistics are not available when Data Progression is running. System Manager opens an informational view specific to the volume. See Also Volume Statistics Tab on page 56 View Volume Charts Volume charts show read and write performance in real time. Information includes the logical space of each volume that is consumed. See Also Volume Charts Tab on page 57 View Volume Distribution Reports Volume Distribution Reports show how volumes are consuming storage space.Next Steps Monitor Volumes When you select a volume the System Tree. and the relationship between logical space and physical space. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 1 Getting Started 12 Storage Center 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Microsoft operating systems. . . . . . . . . . . 27 Managing Volumes . . . Contents Viewing Volume Information . . . . . . 31 Managing Volume Folders . . . . . . . . . . . a volume is assigned a drive letter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . a volume is assigned a mount point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Migrate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Advanced Mapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Dell Compellent 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On UNIX/Linux systems. 14 Creating and Mapping Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror. . . . .2 Volumes A volume is a logical unit of storage that servers can access over a network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Using the Topology Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 User Interface Reference for Volumes . . . the window displays the volume status. System Manager displays information about the node in a View window. Copy/Mirror/ Migrate. Statistics. Storage type. Volume Nodes When you select a node in the System Tree. and the volume status. Storage type.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . See Also User Interface Reference for Volumes on page 48 14 Storage Center 6. Replays (if licensed). Enterprise Manager creates and manages replications. and Chart Replication. and Disk folder. and Disk folder. Storage Profile. Replay Calendar. The Replication tab shows status about the current replication activity. volume type. Node Selected Information Displayed Volumes Lists volumes and volume folders. logical size. Replay profile. logical size. and provides general information about the content displayed in System Manager. This section describes the icons used. and appears for a volume only for the duration of a replication. volume type. For each volume not included in a folder. Storage Profile. profile. [Volume Folder] Lists each volume in the folder.Chapter 2 Volumes Viewing Volume Information Volumes appear in the System Tree under the Storage node. [Volume] Shows information specific to the selected volume organized in tabbed windows by information type: General. see your FluidFS documentation. and types. or Migrate in the Storage Center System Manager. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7 Dell Compellent 15 . and monitoring FluidFS clusters using Enterprise Manager. Note: Replays and Replay Profiles appear if a Storage Center is licensed for Data Instant Replay. For information about adding. Note: This icon is also displayed for volumes that have been configured to Copy. Context menu commands customarily displayed near the top of the System Explorer window are disabled. Secondary Live Volume is the Live Volume to which the primary Live Volume is replicating. Destination volume for a replication from a remote Storage Center Primary Live Volume is the volume currently replicating to a secondary Live Volume. Mirror.Viewing Volume Information Volume Icons System Manager uses icons to indicate volume node. Icon Volume Type Volume node — all volumes Volume folder Standard volume mapped to a server(s) Standard volume not mapped to any server FluidFS volume Note: Volumes created using the FluidFS file system cannot be modified or deleted using Storage Center System Manager. Therefore. • For additional information about FluidFS. Replication information appears in a tab for the duration of the Replication. folders. refer to the Enterprise Manager Administrator’s Guide. Source volume for a replication to a remote Storage Center. removing. for these volumes: • Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a volume are disabled. • Data was copied to a portable volume. See Also Portable Volume on page 58 16 Storage Center 6. the portable volume node appears in the Storage Center System Tree if the Storage Center is licensed for Remote Instant Replay and if any of the following are true: • A USB disk is connected to the Storage Center. After Enterprise Manager has created a portable volume. • A volume was or is waiting to be restored from a portable volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 2 Volumes Portable Volume Node Enterprise Manager creates and manages portable volumes. The wizard prompts you for a volume size. expand the Storage node. The dialog box displays information about the volumes and the total volume space configured. 5 On the Volume Properties dialog box click the General tab (if not already selected). click Volume Properties– Multiple Volumes dialog box appears. 1 In the System Tree. This dialog box displays information about the selected volume(s). Select the disk folder. A page appears asking you to select the redundancy level you would like to use. The disk folder contains the physical disks the volume will use for storage. 4 In the toolbar. but also provides controls to enable or disable read and write cache. expand the Storage node. 1 In the System Tree. 3 Click Continue. View Properties for Specific Volumes Volume properties provide similar information as the View window. Therefore. Note: If the disk folder chosen has not been prepared for the redundancy type chosen.Creating and Mapping Volumes Creating and Mapping Volumes User access to volumes is controlled by user groups and associated volume folders and volumes. a page opens with instructions for preparing the disk folder. Dell Compellent 17 . 1 From the Storage Management menu. it is because your user volume default options were configured to disallow these choices. Follow the instructions and click Continue when done. 3 In the main window. 4 Click the General tab (if not already selected). select a volume or select multiple volumes by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and selecting more than one volume. Create a Volume If some options shown in the following examples do not appear when creating and configuring volumes. click Volume Properties. 4 Click either Non-Redundant or Redundant. 3 In the toolbar. 2 Select the top-most Volumes icon. group volumes into folders based on the way you want to control user access. select Create→ Volume. 2 The Create Volume wizard prompts you to select a disk folder for the volume to use. 2 Select the top-most Volumes icon. View General Properties for all Volumes The volume properties displayed vary based on your user volume defaults. You can then create a corresponding user group and grant access to that volume folder or volume. 6 Click Continue. see Creating Replay Profiles on page 62. or click Create a New Replay Profile. 18 Storage Center 6.Chapter 2 Volumes 5 Enter the volume size and select a unit of measure from the drop-down menu. 8 Click Continue. Note: The Advanced button is displayed only if your User Volume Defaults allow you to modify the Storage Profile and cache settings to be used by the volume. If Data Instant Replay is licensed for your Storage Center.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 7 Select an existing Replay Profile. For more information about creating Replay profiles. the Replay Profile page appears. The wizard displays a page listing current folders. System Manager passes this size to the server when the volume is mounted. Creating and Mapping Volumes 9 Select an existing folder in which to create the volume or click Create a New Folder to create a new folder. 13 Review the attributes. System Manager displays volume attributes. 11 (Optional) Add notes. some or all of the following commands may appear on this page. 12 Click Continue. Depending on your configuration. click Create Now. The last page displays a confirmation of the volume creation and presents options available after creating a volume. If correct. Dell Compellent 19 . 10 Enter a volume name or accept the default. 20 Storage Center 6.Chapter 2 Volumes 14 Perform additional tasks or click Close to exit the wizard.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Create Volumes wizard starts. The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected in the volume list. The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume. select the volume to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume. Volume 2. Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before creating it. • If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected. 1 Right-click on the volume or volume folder node and select Create→ Volumes. 2 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user attributes when adding a volume. The number in the name of each volume increments by one: Volume 1. System Manager creates the volumes specified. displaying a default volume to create. 3 Click Create Volumes Now. see step Step 4 on page 23. See Also Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22 Dell Compellent 21 . • If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected. and so on. click Add Volume.Creating and Mapping Volumes Create Multiple Volumes Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes in a single operation. then copy the attributes from this volume when adding additional volumes. and so on. 3 Select whether to copy the attributes of the selected volume or use the default user attributes when adding a volume. By default. • If Use My Volume Defaults when adding a volume is selected.Chapter 2 Volumes Create Multiple Volumes for a Server Use the Create Volumes wizard to create multiple volumes and map them to a server in a single operation. the name of the volume is based on the name of the server. click Add Volume. • If Copy the selected volume when adding a volume is selected. Note: If you want to modify the attributes of a volume before copying it. server cluster. Volumes are only created when you select Create Volumes Now. 1 In the System Tree. Volume 2. The added volumes uses your user volume defaults to create the volume. see step Step 4 on page 23. The number in the name of each volume increments by one: Volume 1. select the volume to copy from the list of volumes and click Add Volume. you should modify the first volume in the list. The Create Volumes wizard starts. 2 From the shortcut menu. select a server. 22 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Note: Adding a volume to the volume list in the Create Volumes wizard does not cause the volume to be created. select Create Volumes. If you intend to add multiple volumes with similar attributes. or virtual server. The added volume copies all attributes except the name from the volume selected in the volume list. 5 (Optional) To remove a volume from the Create Volumes wizard. a Click Modify Selected Volume.Creating and Mapping Volumes 4 (Optional) Follow these steps to modify the attributes of a volume in the Create Volumes wizard. b Modify the attributes as needed. c Click Apply Changes to save changes and return to the volume list. Note: The volume attributes that you can change depend on your user volume defaults. Dell Compellent 23 . If the Map volumes to this server using default settings upon creation check box is selected. The wizard displays a page that contains the volume attributes that can be changed. select the volume to remove and click Remove Selected Volume. the new volumes will be automatically mapped to the selected server using default mapping options. 6 Click Create Volumes Now. 3 Select a server to which to map the selected volume. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Click Create Now. 2 From the shortcut menu. The volume is mapped.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . By mapping the volume to a server you create the link from the volume to the server. This link is used to access the volume. See Also Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317 24 Storage Center 6. A list of servers is displayed. select Map Volume to Server. select an unmapped (gray) volume. 4 Click Continue.Chapter 2 Volumes Map a Volume to a Server Mapping enables servers to connect to volumes. Expand the Storage node if necessary. the last server you selected is chosen as the server to which to map the volume.Creating and Mapping Volumes Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster To create multiple volumes automatically mapped to a server. select Map Volumes to Server. the mapping is not performed and the volume is only partially connected to the cluster. Storage Center attempts to map an included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. Volumes in the selected folder or selected node are listed. you can: • Accept the selected server or server cluster. 5 (Optional) Click Advanced to modify advanced mapping settings. From here. 3 From the shortcut menu. If the LUN selected is not available on a particular server. select a volume folder or the Volumes node. 1 In the System Tree. The volume is mapped to a single server. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configurations. An exception to this is if the server is part of a server cluster. 6 Click Map Volumes Now. A list of servers appears. System Manager asks you to confirm. Note: When creating a server cluster. or use the <Ctrl> key to select more than one unmapped volume. 2 Select an unmapped (gray) volume. see Create Multiple Volumes for a Server on page 22. • Create a server or server cluster to which to map the volumes. 4 Click Continue. • Choose a different server or server cluster. By default. See Also Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27 Dell Compellent 25 . This page of the wizard displays advanced options available when mapping selected volumes to the selected server. System Manager asks you to confirm. If a mapping is still active. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. 4 (Optional) Click Advanced to restrict mapping paths. A list of remote systems appears. 2 From the shortcut menu. click Create Now. The mappings confirmation page appears.Chapter 2 Volumes Map a Volume to Remote System Mapping a volume to a remote system causes the volume to appear as a remote volume on the remote system. 3 Select the mapping(s) to remove. 1 In the System Tree. Before removing the mapping. • In a clustered-controller system. If you remove a mapping to a volume that is in use. such as FC or iSCSI. See Also Volume Icons on page 15 Remove Mappings from a Volume Follow these steps to remove the mappings from a volume. 3 Select a remote system. then click Continue. 6 System Manager asks you to confirm. To confirm. 5 Click Remove Mappings Now. From here you can: • Restrict the path to one transport. select a controller to which to map the volume. select an unmapped (gray) volume. The volume can then be used as a Replication target. The Remove Mappings from Volume wizard appears. the server will no longer have access to the volume and will have read/write errors. 5 Click Continue. 26 Storage Center 6. select a volume. confirm that the volume is no longer in use by the server. select Remove Mappings from Volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 4 Click Continue. select Map Volume to Remote System. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample window shown below.Using Advanced Mapping Options Using Advanced Mapping Options To view advanced options. 3 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue. Select a Logical Unit Number Use the Advanced Mapping options to specify the LUN to use when mapping a volume to a server. 5 Click Advanced. 2 From the shortcut menu. expand the Storage node and select an unmapped volume. Dell Compellent 27 . 4 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page. click Advanced. select Map Volume to Server. 1 In the System Tree. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configuration. The Advanced options page appears. A list of servers is displayed. The Advanced option page appears. make sure that Allow Advanced Mapping is enabled in your User Volume Mapping Defaults. select Use Next Available LUN. If the volume you are mapping is not a boot volume. select Map Volume using LUN 0. clear Use Next Available LUN. Expand the storage node if necessary. • To map the selected volume to the server using a specific LUN. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page. this option does not appear. click Advanced. Note: Advanced options available differ depending on server and Storage Center configuration. Storage Center uses a different LUN if the specified LUN is already in use.Chapter 2 Volumes 6 Select a Logical Unit Number. or when mapping a volume to a virtual server. select and enter a LUN. 28 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . If a volume has already been mapped to the selected server using LUN 0. The Advanced option page appears. The options you see may differ from options displayed on the sample window shown below. when mapping a a volume to a server on a dual-controller Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree. • By default. select an unmapped volume. make sure this option is cleared. LUN 0 is reserved for boot volumes. See Also Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324 Restrict Mapping Paths These options appear only when mapping a volume to a server with multiple server HBA ports. 7 Click Continue. 2 Select the server to which to map the volume and click Continue. If you do not want to use a different LUN when the specified LUN is already in use. • If the volume you are mapping is a boot volume. To use the next available LUN. the Only map using specified server ports option appears. To map a volume using specified server ports.Using Advanced Mapping Options 4 Choose the option that applies to the type of server to which you are mapping this volume: • If the selected server has HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre Channel and iSCSI). select the check box and select the transport type to use. select the Map to controller checkbox and select a controller. select whether to map the volume to the Host only. To map a volume using a specified transport type. • To map a volume to a specific controller. Virtual server only. 5 Click Continue. • To map a volume to a host on a virtual server. select the check box and select the ports to use. • If the selected server has multiple server HBA ports. Dell Compellent 29 . or Both host and virtual server. the Only map using a specified transport type option appears. 30 Storage Center 6. A list of servers is displayed. select Map Volume to Server. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . A list of servers is displayed. The Advanced option page appears.Chapter 2 Volumes Configure Multipathing Use the Map Volume to Server wizard to set the number of paths to use for multipathing. Note: If the server operating system does not support multi-pathing. click Advanced. click Advanced. this option is not displayed. Create a Read-Only Volume To prevent data from being written to a volume. Expand the storage node if necessary. select an unmapped volume. 5 Click Continue. The Advanced option page appears. select an unmapped volume. 2 From the shortcut menu. select the check box to present this volume as read-only. 4 Under Configure Volume Use. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Under Down Server Ports select the check box to enable mapping to down server ports. Expand the storage node if necessary. 4 Select the maximum number of paths used to map the selected volume to the server. The maximum number of paths allowed may be limited by the server’s operating system. Expand the storage node if necessary. 5 Click Continue. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page. 3 In the Map Volume to Server confirmation page. 1 In the System Tree. select Map Volume to Server. 1 In the System Tree. A list of servers is displayed. select Map Volume to Server. The Advanced option page appears. Create Mapping to Down Server Ports This selection appears only if the selected server has down ports. select an unmapped volume. click Advanced. 5 Click Continue. set the properties to be read-only. The Volume Properties dialog box displays advanced options. select a target volume. 2 From the shortcut menu. Dell Compellent 31 . If this option is cleared.Managing Volumes Managing Volumes This section describes tasks for maintaining and managing volumes after they are set up and mapped to servers. The Volume Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Advanced tab. by default data is written to the highest tier of storage configured for the volume. This is useful when performing an operating-system-level copy of data to a Storage Center volume from a server-attached data source. No Replays are taken for the volume during data import. 1 In the System Tree. Enable Import Data to Lowest Tier Mode Use Import Data to Lowest Tier to write large amounts of data to the lowest tier of storage configured for a volume. select Properties. 32 Storage Center 6. When this checkbox is selected.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Import data to lowest tier of storage option is not displayed on the Volume Properties screen. information about the volume that is set for importing data to the lowest tier appears with a message stating that data is being imported to the lowest tier of storage. Importing data is managed in Enterprise Manager as part of the Replication to that volume. No Replays are taken for the volume during data import. If this option is cleared. by default. data is written to the lowest tier of storage available based upon the configuration of the storage profile of the volume. For more information. data is written to the highest tier of storage configured for the volume. Note: Import mode is not allowed for volumes that are mapped to another Storage Center for use as Replication destinations. see the Enterprise Manager User Guide.Chapter 2 Volumes 4 Select the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox. In the System Explorer. Disable Import to Lowest Tier Mode After data is imported to the lowest tier. replays are not taken for that volume. 2 Clear the Import data to lowest tier of storage checkbox. Dell Compellent 33 . Note: After data is imported. it is your responsibility to take the volume out of Import to lowest tier mode. The volume is no longer in import mode. 1 Select the volume that has been placed into import to lowest tier mode.Managing Volumes While a volume is in Import to lowest tier mode. return the volume to normal operating mode. Replays are resumed when the volume is taken out of import mode. From the shortcut menu. select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click OK. you must already have a boot from SAN volume created and in use. 6 Click Continue. select Volume→ Create Boot from SAN Copy. 2 Click Continue.Chapter 2 Volumes Create a Boot from SAN Volume Boot from SAN dramatically reduces the time to recover servers by creating and storing Replays of the boot volume at the disaster recovery site. power up a spare server. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu. The Create Boot from SAN Volume wizard starts. Prerequisites To use the Create Boot from SAN Copy wizard. The next page prompts you for the name and folder for the volume. A boot from SAN volume is operating system-dependent and requires the server HBA to be specifically configured and enabled to boot from the SAN. point the server to a boot image on the SAN. 5 Select a name and folder or accept the default. See your respective operating system and HBA provider to create this configuration. 34 Storage Center 6. 4 Click Continue. In the event of a failure. A page asking you to select a source volume appears.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Boot from SAN function allows servers to use an external SAN volume as the boot volume for the server. The next page prompts you to create a Replay. and boot the server up. 3 Select a source volume from the list of volumes. or accept the defaults. Dell Compellent 35 . 8 Create a new server or server cluster. A confirmation page appears. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts.Managing Volumes 7 Click Create Now. 9 Click Continue. For example. 3 Click the Advanced tab. Reset VMS Unique Disk ID If there are volumes on storage running the Open VMS operating system. The boot from SAN volume is created. select Properties. select a volume. 5 Click OK. select Properties. Allow Replays to Coalesce Use this option to change the setting that allows Replays to coalesce into an active Replay. You may need to reset this value when recovering a volume from a Replay. 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 Select or clear the Enforce Volume Space Consumption Limit check box. 1 In the System Tree. select Properties. 4 Enter the UQ ID. 6 Click OK. 4 Select or clear the Allow Replays to coalesce into active Replay check box. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 2 From the shortcut menu. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. • If Data Progression is licensed. select or change a Replay Profile attached to the volume. 3 Click the Advanced tab.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 From the shortcut menu. 5 Enter a Space Consumption Limit value and select the units. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. took a Replay. 5 Click OK.Chapter 2 Volumes 10 (Optional) Click Advanced to set Advanced Mapping options. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. select a volume. select a Storage Profile attached to this volume. • If Data Instant Replay is enabled. select a volume. 1 In the System Tree. which allow you to: • Enter a logical unit number (LUN). the new view volume would have a new Disk ID and you would have to modify the value to match the original Disk ID for the volume before the server will recognize it as the same volume. and then mounted a new view volume up to the server. this tab displays the Unique Disk ID (UQ ID) used to identify the volume. • Restrict mapping paths • Configure volume use as read-only 11 Click Create Now. 36 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree. if you mapped a volume to a server. See Also Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27 Change Volume Space Consumption Limit Use this option to limit the size of the selected volume. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. select Properties. select a volume. 2 Click Properties. Add Notes to a Volume Folder Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties. 3 Click the Cache tab. • Select or clear the Enable Read Cache checkbox. 5 Click OK. 4 Do one of the following: • Select or clear the Enable Write Cache checkbox. write performance increases by holding written data in volatile memory until it can be safely stored on disk. 1 In the System Tree. Dell Compellent 37 . select a volume. When enabled. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. Rename a Volume Follow these steps to change the volume name. 5 Click OK to save changes. 3 Click the Info tab. Note: Because an SSD is itself a memory device. Dell Compellent recommends disabling write cache for all volumes using SSDs to maximize performance for most applications. 3 Enter a new name for the folder. 2 Click Properties. When enabled. 1 In the System Tree. Disabling read cache for volumes using SSDs is application-specific and may or may not improve performance. The Volume Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 4 Click OK. 4 Enter information about the volume in the Notes field. 2 From the shortcut menu. however caching that is set Storage Centerwide overwrites individual volume cache settings. 1 In the System Tree. read performance is improved by anticipating the next read and then holding it in volatile memory. select a volume. Dell Compellent recommends testing applications prior to disabling read cache.Managing Volumes Change Volume Cache Properties Data caching can be set at the volume level. 2 Select volumes to delete by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key and clicking on volumes. Selecting this check box is not recommended. 3 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Click Yes. the volume and metadata are immediately deleted and cannot be recovered. The list of volumes appears in the main frame. select a volume. select Delete.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . System Manager warns you if a volume is mapped to a server and prompts you to confirm the deletion. but after the Recycle Bin is emptied. 38 Storage Center 6. data on that volume cannot be recovered. The volume is deleted. Caution: If you select the Skip Recycle Bin and delete volume check box.Chapter 2 Volumes Delete a Volume Follow these steps to delete a volume and move it to the Recycle Bin. System Manager informs you if the volume is actively mapped to a server and asks you to confirm. select Delete. Delete Multiple Volumes Follow these steps to delete multiple volumes from within a volume folder. 3 Click Yes. select a volume folder. 1 In the System Tree. The volumes are deleted. You can recover the volume from the Recycle Bin. it is moved to the Recycle Bin. select Restore Volume. select Expand Volume. 1 In the System Tree. The Recycle Bin lists restorable volumes. However. The Recycle Bin is emptied. Expand a Volume Virtual capacity can be expanded to be greater than the physical capacity. expand the Volumes node to view volume components including the Recycle Bin node. Empty the Recycle Bin Deleting a volume moves data on the volume to the Recycle Bin. after the Recycle Bin is emptied. 4 From the shortcut menu. You can recover data from the Recycle Bin until the Recycle Bin is emptied. you can no longer recover the data. 1 In the System Tree. Dell Compellent 39 . 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 Click Yes. System Manager lists items in the recycle bin and asks you to confirm. You can restore a deleted volume from the Recycle Bin. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 3 Select the volume to be restored. 4 Click Expand Volume Now. The volume is restored. select a volume. After the Recycle Bin is emptied. but previous mappings are not restored. select Volume→ Empty Recycle Bin. items that were in the bin cannot be restored. 2 Expand the Recycle Bin node. 3 Specify the new size for the volume in the New Volume Size field. The Expand Volume wizard starts.Managing Volumes Restore a Deleted Volume When a volume is deleted. expand Volumes. Rename a Volume Folder Follow these steps to change a volume folder name. 2 Select whether to create the folder at the root level or within another folder. 2 Select a volume folder. The Create Volume Folder wizard starts. 5 Click Create Now. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 3 Enter a volume folder name. select Create →Folder →Volume Folder. 4 (Optional) Add notes.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 5 Click OK. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 3 Click Properties. 40 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree. The volume folder is created. or accept the default name. 4 Enter a new name for the folder in the Volume Folder field. Create a Volume Folder Follow these steps to create a volume folder.Chapter 2 Volumes Managing Volume Folders Use Volume folders to group volumes based on the way you want to control user access. You can control access to volume folders and volumes through a combination of User Groups and User Privileges. Dell Compellent 41 . 3 Click Properties. 4 From the list of folders. 2 Select a volume folder. select a server. 6 Click Move Now. Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes Replays create space-efficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. A list of Replay Profiles appears. select Delete. 1 In the System Tree. 1 In the System Tree. 2 Select a volume folder. 3 From the shortcut menu. 6 Click OK. System Manager asks you to confirm. select Apply Replay Profiles to Volumes. select Move to Folder. expand Volumes. Delete a Volume Folder You cannot delete a volume folder that contains volumes. 1 In the System Tree. or is referenced by volumes that are in the Recycle Bin. 5 Click Continue. 3 From the shortcut menu. The volumes are moved to the selected folder. 2 From the shortcut menu. expand Volumes. The Move — Volume(s) wizard starts.Managing Volume Folders Add Notes to a Volume Folder Follow these steps to add notes to the volume properties. 4 Click Yes. The Volume Folder Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. The folder is deleted. 1 In the System Tree. System Manager asks you to confirm. Move Volumes to a Folder Follow these steps to move a volume or volumes to a different folder. select a folder to which to move the volume. 4 Click the Info tab. or select multiple volumes by holding down the <Shift> key or <Ctrl> key and clicking on each volume. 2 Select a volume folder. 5 Enter information about the folder in the Notes field. expand Volumes. other volume folders. and Migrate Functions Data can be moved from one volume to another using any of three methods—copy. Copy does not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is completed. The Replay Profiles are attached. Mirror. select a volume. See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62. mirror. Copy a Volume Copy copies data from a source volume to a destination volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 In the Copy Volume wizard. • Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Choose to replace existing Replay Profiles attached to the volumes mapped to this server or not. The Copy Volume wizard starts. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server. 2 From the shortcut menu.Chapter 2 Volumes 3 Select one or more Relay Profiles or create a new Replay Profile. select Copy→ Copy Volume. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 42 Storage Center 6. The duplicate volume is immediately created. or migrate—depending on the intended result. select one of the following: • Select a Destination Volume: Copies the source volume to the selected destination volume. Changes made to the source volume during the copy process are added to the destination volume. • Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the copy operation. These functions move data within a Storage Center. Using Copy. 5 Click Save Configuration. The duplicate volume is immediately created. 1 In the System Tree. and Migrate Functions Mirror a Volume Mirror dynamically updates the destination volume when the source volume changes. • Create New Volume: Creates a new volume to be the destination of the mirror operation. • Create Exact Duplicate: Creates a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. select a volume. select Copy→ Mirror Volume. 2 From the shortcut menu. 3 In the Mirror Volume wizard.Using Copy. select a destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server. select one of the following: • Select a Destination Volume: To mirror the source volume to an existing volume. Mirror. The Mirror Volume wizard starts. The source and destination volumes are kept synchronized. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 Dell Compellent 43 . • (Conditional) Click Start to mirror the volume now. Enter a date and time. 2 From the volume shortcut menu.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 In the Copy/Migrate Volume wizard. all volume-to-server mappings are moved to the destination volume. Copy/Migrate options are displayed. The destination volume cannot be mapped to a server.Chapter 2 Volumes Migrate a Volume Migrate is the same as Copy. select one of the following: • Select a Destination Volume: Migrate the source volume to an existing destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. all volume-to-server mappings are moved to the destination volume and the source volume is deleted. The copied data (and its mappings) now reside on the destination volume. • (Conditional) Click Schedule to schedule the migration at a later time. except that when the copy is finished. • Create Exact Duplicate: Create a volume with the same attributes as the source volume. When System Manager is finished with the copy. • (Conditional) Click Continue to migrate now. The duplicate volume is immediately created. 5 Click Continue. 4 To migrate data to an existing volume. The Copy/Migrate Volume wizard starts. select a volume. Copy/Migrate first copies data from the source volume to the destination volume. select Copy→ Copy/Migrate. 1 In the System Tree. Changes to the source volume while the copy is in progress are reflected in the destination volume. A review page appears. See Also Create a Volume on page 17 44 Storage Center 6. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume. The destination volume cannot be smaller than the source volume and cannot be mapped to a server. select a destination volume from the list of volumes displayed. Click Schedule Now. • Create New Volume: Create a new volume to be the destination of the migrate operation. Using the Topology Explorer Using the Topology Explorer With Topology Explorer you can easily map volumes to servers and external (remote) Storage Centers by dragging one component to another. select Topology Explorer. Open the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to open and navigate the Topology Explorer. 1 From the View menu. volumes in the middle column and external Storage Center in the right column. connections between the volumes and the Remote volume to which they are replicating are also shown. If a Replication is in process. Dell Compellent 45 . The Topology Explorer displays objects associated with the Storage Center: servers in the left column. Chapter 2 Volumes 2 Click on the Connections icon to toggle between Show All Connections and Show Connections for Selected Object Only.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 46 Storage Center 6. 3 Click on the Folders icon in the upper right to toggle between displaying and hiding folders. Create a Volume Folder in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Create Volume Folder wizard. 1 Drag the New External Device command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create Volume wizard starts.Using the Topology Explorer Note: When the Topology Explorer displays folders. 3 Follow the Create Volume Folder wizard instructions. 1 Drag the New Volume command object to the Topology Explorer. 2 Follow the Map Volume to Server wizard instructions. Map a Volume to a Server in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Map Volume to Server wizard. 2 Follow the Classify Disk as External Device wizard instructions. Dell Compellent 47 . The Map Volume to Server wizard starts. 2 Follow the Create Volume wizard instructions. 2 Drag the New Volume Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. 1 Drag a server onto a volume or drag a volume onto a server. The Classify Disk as External Device wizard starts. two additional command objects appear at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create New Volume Folder. Create an External Device with the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Classify Disk as External Device wizard. The Create Volume Folder wizard starts. 1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object appears. Create a Volume in the Topology Explorer Follow these steps to start the Create Volume wizard. Status Information If an element is down. New data written to the volume after the Replay is written to active portion of the volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . After a Replay is taken on a volume. Data Progression manages the volume allocations in configure Volume Active space only. Storage Center 6. however the Replay area may still be accessible for reads. Exists on the Storage Center as a read/write volume. As more changes to the volume occur (as writes in the active space) and as more Replays are taken. This data can be made available by creating a view volume to allow for data recovery or backups. This is known as Replay overhead. Logical Size Logical size of the volume. Volume Type 48 A Volume Type may be one of the following: • Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been taken. • Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay. some of the Replay data may become inaccessible. Replay Profile Name of Replay profile attached to the volume. Volumes or Volume Folders When you select a Volume or Volume Folder. Also displays the controller on which the volume is active. Status Shows volume status — Up or Down. Field Description Name Name of the volume or folder. the active data that exists on that volume is marked as read-only and is moved to the Tier and Class that is configured for Replays.Chapter 2 Volumes User Interface Reference for Volumes This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show volume information. • Replication: Target volume being replicated from another Storage Center. System Manager lists the volumes associated with the selection. A Replay-enabled volume consists of two different layers of volume space: Active (writable) and Replay (historical. Type Object type — volume or a volume folder. displays reason it is down. or readonly). Storage Type Default is 2 MB Redundant. See Also Viewing Volume Information on page 14 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210 Dell Compellent 49 . Disk Folder Name of folder the volume in which the volume reside (if any).User Interface Reference for Volumes Field Description Storage Profile Name of Storage Profile attached to the volume. 50 Storage Center 6. • Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken. in any. Each tab provides information about the volume. The Volume General tab provides an overview of the selected volume. Size Size of the volume. Field Description Name Name of the volume. Disk Folder Folder the volume uses for storage (if any). Also displays the name of the controller on which the volume is active.Chapter 2 Volumes Volume General Tab Selecting a volume in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top.map to a server to activate)”.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Status Volume status — Up or Down. If a volume is not mapped to a server. Folder Disk folder that the volume uses for storage. Serial Number Volume Serial Number (VSN). Index Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification. Volume Type May be one of the following: • Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken. System Manager displays the message: “Down (currently inactive . Note: Tabs displayed may differ depending on features licensed on your Storage Center. See Also Viewing Volume Information on page 14 Dell Compellent 51 . and errors for read/write operations. Storage Profile Profile attached to this volume.User Interface Reference for Volumes Field Description Replay Profiles Replay Profiles used for this volume (if any). blocks. Cache Settings Settings enabled for various read/write operations. Notes Optional notes about the volume. Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom. Volume Statistics Number of requests. LUN Logical unit number assigned (if applicable). Type Transport type: FC or iSCSI.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Field Description Server Name of the server to which the volume is mapped. or delete volume mapping. Controller Port WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped. Folder Path Name and path of volume folder (if applicable). Server Port WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped. Read Only Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume Read Only. Use this tab to add. See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 Map Multiple Volumes to a Server or Server Cluster on page 25 Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26 Remove Mappings from a Volume on page 26 Using Advanced Mapping Options on page 27 52 Storage Center 6.Chapter 2 Volumes Volume Mapping Tab The volume Mapping tab shows to what server the selected volume is mapped. change. Status Indicates whether the link is Up or Down. Source Volume Name of volume from which data is being copied. medium. or low. See Also Copy a Volume on page 42 Mirror a Volume on page 43 Migrate a Volume on page 44 Dell Compellent 53 . Percent Synced Percentage that destination volume matches source volume. or synched Priority Specifies the priority of a CMM operation: high. running. State Specifies the state of a CMM operation: down. Current Replay ID of latest Replay. Field Description Type Specifies the type of CMM operation: copy. Reverse Mirror After Migrate Copy back to original source after migrate. or migrate. Delete After Migrate Indicates wether source volume is deleted after a copy. Destination Volume Name of volume to which data is being copied. mirror. Remaining Percentage of data left to copy.User Interface Reference for Volumes Volume Copy/Mirror/Migrate Tab The Copy/Mirror/Migrate tab shows status and history of CMMs for the Volume. Copy History History of Replays. Replication History In the right frame. the System Manager displays the replications that were taken of that volume on the remote Storage Center you selected from the list of replications. select a replication. 54 Display Description List of Replications In the top frame. Storage Center 6.Chapter 2 Volumes Replication Tab Replications are managed by Enterprise Manager. You can view replication status during the replication process. The main pane displays information about that replication. the System Manager displays a list of replications for the volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Note: The Replication tab appears only if the volume is currently being replicated. Replication Information From the list of replications in the top frame. Type of replay: Consistent or Non-consistent. Dell Compellent 55 . Replay is nearing expiration date. See the icons following this table. Source How the replay was created.User Interface Reference for Volumes Volume Replay Tab When you select the Replay tab in the Volume view. Frozen. Replay created automatically from a Replay Profile. System Manager displays Replay history for the selected volume. Description Replay schedule. Space Recovery Run Whether Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program was run. Replay is coalescing with other data. The key at the bottom of the window describes the icons used. State Whether replay is Active. Replay Size Amount of disk space used. Replay created from an external application program. or Expiring. Create Volume Volume name. Expiration Time Date and time when Replay will expire. Replay created through a Replication from a remote Storage Center. Field Description Freeze Time Point in time when Replay was taken. Icon Description Replay created by a user. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . being used by this volume.) Total disk space consumed Equals Disk Space – Replay plus Disk Space – Active. including accessible and inaccessible Replay space. Data Instant Replay overhead That part of Volume Space – Replay that is inaccessible. Disk space is required for RAID 5 parity blocks that is not used in the volume space. Volume Space – Replay Space used by Replays. Disk Space – Active Total disk space including RAID overhead that is being used by this volume. For example. Total volume space consumed Sum of all volume space bars on the chart. The difference between volume space consumed and disk space consumed is the space required for RAID parity. including RAID overhead. Disk Space – Replay Total disk space. basic RAID 10 storage Display of storage savings through the effective use of RAID 5 rather than RAID 10. a RAID 10 volume is written twice. Disk space saved vs.Chapter 2 Volumes See Also Replay Profiles on page 59 Volume Statistics Tab The volume Statistics tab shows disk space usage information for the selected volume. This inaccessible data is previous pages that have been subsequently written to but are still parts of previous Replays. (Total volume space consumed minus Data instant Replay overhead equals the total volume space that would be consumed if all Replays were to be expired. The disk space required is twice the volume space required. 56 Field Description Volume Space – Active Volume space utilized by the data that has been written before a Replay is taken. Storage Center 6. User Interface Reference for Volumes See Also View Volume Statistics on page 11 Volume Charts Tab The volume Charts tab displays read and write performance for the most current one-hour period. The upper chart shows the data transfer rate in KB/second. The lower chart shows the overall IO rate in IOs/second. • Red Line: Reads • Blue Line: Writes • Green Line: Combined See Also View Volume Charts on page 11 Dell Compellent 57 . Vendor Disk vendor name. Control Type Removable. Health Status of the disk. Field Description Name Portable Volume to destination Storage Center name.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Allocated Disk space allocated to the portable volume. Free Space Remaining free disk capacity. Serial Number Disk serial number.Chapter 2 Volumes Portable Volume The Portable Volume node appears at the same level in the tree as the Storage node. Product Disk product name. % Full Used disk capacity expressed as a percentage. Classification USB. See Also Portable Volume Node on page 16 58 Storage Center 6. Capacity Total capacity of the disk. . . . . . 83 Dell Compellent 59 . . . . . . . . . . 62 Modifying Replay Profiles . . This process is called Data Instant Replay and is a licensed Storage Center Feature. . . . . Contents Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No user data is moved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Recovering Data . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Creating Replay Profiles . . . . . . . . Replays create spaceefficient point-in-time copies (PITC) to provide immediate recovery from data loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Working with Replays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and space used by Replays. . . . . . . . . . Storage Center Replays differ from the traditional PITCs because blocks of data or pages are frozen and not copied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . making the process efficient in both time taken to complete the Replay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Replay Profiles A Replay Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and the time at which Replays are deleted (expired). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes All Storage Centers come with two common default Replay Profiles: Daily and Sample You are not required to create any custom Replay Profiles. Sample Replay Profile The Sample Replay Profile takes three Replays for all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. running the Replay with the latest scheduled expiration time. The rules for the Standard Default Sample Replay Profile are as follows: • Monthly Replays are taken on the first day of the month. Note: If multiple Replays are scheduled to run at the same time. System Manager takes a single Replay that includes the multiple Replays. Weekly Replays automatically expire after 5 weeks. Monthly Replays automatically expire after 26 weeks. • Each Replay automatically expires in one week. Daily Replay Profile The rules for the standard Daily Replay Profile are as follows: • The standard Daily Replay Profile takes a Replay once a day at one minute past midnight (12:01 AM) of all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. Daily Replays automatically expire after 5 days. See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 60 Storage Center 6. • Daily Replays are taken every twelve hours between 12:05 AM and 6:00 PM. • Weekly Replays are taken on Saturday at 11:30 PM. if necessary. select the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box. 1 In the System Tree. clear the Replace Existing Replay Profiles check box. After a Replay Profile is applied to volumes. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile. 3 Expand volume folders.Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes Apply a Replay Profile to a Volume One or more Replay Profiles can be applied to one or more volumes. A confirmation page appears. 6 Click Continue. listing volumes. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. subsequent changes to the Replay Profile are applied to all the volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. 4 Select volumes to which to apply the profile. The Apply Replay Profile wizard starts. 5 If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. select Apply to Volume(s). select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu. 7 Click Apply Now. Dell Compellent 61 . Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile. a Replay Profile can require a Replay to be taken once a day. Consistent Replay Profile Non-Consistent Replay Profile Halts IO across all volumes as a group Halts I/O for each volume independently of other volumes. A Replay Profile can contain multiple rules. • Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. For example. Replays not completed before alert is generated are not taken. or once a month. Resource intensive Less resource intensive – depends on the amount of data written since the previous Replay Limited to 40 volumes No limit to the number of volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached Replays are taken of all volumes simultaneously Choose between Serial (one volume at a time) or Parallel (all volumes simultaneously) Can set an Alert if Replays cannot be completed All Replays are taken within a defined time.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Creating Replay Profiles Replay Profiles are a collection of rules describing when to take periodic Replays for one or more volumes and how long before Replays are deleted (expired). • Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the Replay Profile. once a week.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . (This can lead to incomplete groups of Replays across volumes.) 62 Can delete incomplete group of Replays All Replays are taken Can be converted to Non-Consistent Replay Profile Can be converted to Consistent Replay Profile Storage Center 6. Storage Center has two types of Replay Profiles: Consistent and Non-Consistent. • Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. or select how often to run the Replay in a specified period of time. click Select Months. select the frequency to run the Replay: • Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. • Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. Dell Compellent 63 . select Create Replay Profile. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. and then select the Replay expiration time. 6 In the Schedule Type list. and then select the Replay expiration time. 2 From the shortcut menu. 5 Click Add Rule. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree.Creating Replay Profiles Create a Non-Consistent Replay Profile Non-Consistent Replays halt I/O for each volume independently of other volumes. select how often to run the Replay. • Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 1 In the System Tree. select how often to run the Replay. and then select the Replay expiration time. To specify the months of the year to run the Replay. 7 Click Continue. 8 Click Create Now. Chapter 3 Replay Profiles 9 (Optional) Apply the rule: Option Description Apply to Volume(s) Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. • If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server. 64 Storage Center 6. 11 Click Apply Now. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes. 10 Click Continue. select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently mapped to this server. • If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile. A confirmation page appears. If additional volumes are mapped to the server at a later time. Apply to Server • If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. unselect the Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox. • If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. 2 From the shortcut menu. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. 3 Click Continue. select Create Consistent Replay Profile. Dell Compellent 65 . To ensure consistency. 1 In the System Tree.Creating Replay Profiles Create a Consistent Replay Profile Consistent Replay Profiles maintain a consistent set of Replay data across multiple volumes. volume IO is halted for all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached. The Create Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts. 4 Enter a name for the Rule in the Name field. The Create Consistent Replay Profile wizard starts with a warning that Consistent Replay Profiles can cause IO time outs. The rule is created and appears in the System Tree. • Monthly: Select the day(s) or date(s) of the month to run the Replay. 6 Click Add Rule. unselect the Replace existing Replay Profiles checkbox. unselect the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. • Daily: Either select the time to run the Replay. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 12 Click Apply Now. 11 Click Continue. and then select the Replay expiration time. 9 Click Create Now. To specify the months of the year to run the Replay. Note: The Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes currently mapped to this server. Select the server to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. • If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server. 66 Storage Center 6. If additional volumes are mapped to the server at a later time. select the frequency to run the Replay: • Once: Select the date and time to run the Replay and when to expire the Replay. 8 Click Continue. Changes to the rules for taking a Replay only affect Replays taken in the future. select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. or select how often to run the Replay in a specified period of time. Apply to Server • If you would like to add this Replay Profile to the list of Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. • If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the selected volumes. Changes to the rules for expiring Replays go into effect immediately for all Replays created by the profile. Note: Subsequent changes to the Replay Profile will be applied to all volumes using the Replay Profile. click Select Months. A confirmation page appears. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select how often to run the Replay. 10 (Optional) Apply the rule: Option Description Apply to Volume(s) Select the volume(s) to which you would like to apply the selected Replay Profile. select the Replace existing Replay profiles checkbox. select how often to run the Replay. the Replay Profile will not be applied to those volumes. and then select the Replay expiration time. • If you would like this Replay Profile to replace any Replay Profiles already in use by the volumes mapped to the selected server. • Weekly: Select the day(s) to run the Replay.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles 5 Enter notes (up to 255 characters) about the Replay profile in the Notes field. and then select the Replay expiration time. 7 In the Schedule Type list. days. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 6 In the Schedule Type list. 9 Click Continue. 2 From the shortcut menu. 9 Click Create Now. 1 In the System Tree. • Selected Daily Time Period: Enter a time interval in hours or minutes. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles. days. select Create Replay Profile. 8 Enter an expiration interval in minutes. Schedule a Daily Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each day. 7 Enter a time period in minutes. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 1 In the System Tree. Enter any notes (up to 255 characters). select Create Replay Profile. 5 Click Add Rule. Select the up or down arrows to scroll to the time when the Replay will be taken. 8 Click Continue. hours. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. hours. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. select Create Replay Profile. select Daily for a daily Replay Profile. Dell Compellent 67 . The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles. • Once a Day: Click in the Hour or Minute field. 1 In the System Tree. 6 In the Schedule Type list. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts.Creating Replay Profiles Schedule a One-time Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run one time. 2 From the shortcut menu. 7 Choose a time for a Daily Replay Profile: either once a day or at a chosen time. To restrict daily Replay Profiles. Schedule a Weekly Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will run at the same time each week. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. select the hours between which the Replay is taken. 6 In the Schedule Type list. 10 Enter a name or accept the default. 2 From the shortcut menu. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. or weeks after which the Replay will expire. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. or weeks after which the Replay will expire. The wizard displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. 5 Click Add Rule. 5 Click Add Rule. select Once for a one-time Replay Profile. 11 Click Create Now. select Weekly. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. c Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and the hours during which the Replay can run. c Select one or more weeks of the month to schedule the Replay. 11 Click Create Now. b Select one or more days of the week to schedule the Replay. The Create Replay Profile wizard starts. 7 Click Continue. a To specify the months of the year to run the Replay. 9 Chose an expiration interval in minutes. 3 Enter a Name for the Replay Profile in the Name field.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles 7 Select one or more days of the week. 68 Storage Center 6. click Select Months and select one or more months in the dialog box and click OK. Schedule a Monthly Replay Follow these steps to create a Replay that will at the same time each month. you can limit the number of Replays by choosing the hours during which Replays will be taken. Monthly By Date a Click the blue Date tab. A page allowing you to enter a Schedule Type appears. If you select an interval. d Chose an expiration interval after which the Replay will be deleted. days. hours. 10 Click Continue.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . or weeks after which the Replays expire. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. The page displays the schedule and lifetime for the Replay. 8 Select either a time each day for a Replay. b Select one or more dates to schedule Replays. or an interval. The next page displays the schedule and expiration for the rule. either on the same day of the month or on the same date each month. Monthly By Day a Click the red Days tab. 4 Enter any notes about the Replay Profile (up to 255 characters) in the Notes field. 8 Click Create Now. select Create Replay Profile. 5 Click Add Rule. d Select the time of day to run the Replay or select how often to run the Replay and the hours during which the Replay can run. The Replay Profile appears in the list of Profiles. 1 In the System Tree. 6 In the Schedule Type list. select Monthly. 2 From the shortcut menu. The default Daily and Sample profiles cannot be modified. 3 (Optional) Modify the display by selecting any of the following: • Refresh—Refreshes the display. 1 In the System Tree. View Replays Attached to a Volume Follow these steps to see a list of Replays that have been run on a specific volume. • Set Display Field—Allows you to reorder display fields. View Volumes Attached to a Replay Profile Follow these steps to see which volumes are running a specific Replay Profile. • Set Update Frequency—Allows you to turn off updates or set a new frequency. 1 In the System Tree. click the Volumes tab. See Also Modify Volume Maximums on page 74 Dell Compellent 69 . 2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume. • Modify Volume Maximums—Opens the Modify Volume Maximums wizard. • Set Replay View—Toggles between the default view and volume tree view. select a volume. 2 In the main pane. select a Replay Profile.Modifying Replay Profiles Modifying Replay Profiles Any custom Replay Profile can be changed. System Manager displays all volumes attached to the profile. System Manager displays a list of Replays for that volume. 70 Storage Center 6. select Properties. 7 Click Apply Changes. 1 Select a Replay Profile. 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 From the shortcut menu. The Replay Properties dialog box appears.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles View Individual Replay Properties Follow these steps to see general information about a Replay Profile. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. 3 From the list of Replays. Change Profile Schedule Follow these steps to change a Replay schedule. The main pane displays general volume information. 5 If you change expiration time or description.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . click OK. 5 Change the frequency of the Replay. select a specific Replay. 4 Click Modify Rule. 3 Select a Rule in the Replay Profile. select a volume. 6 Click Continue. select Modify. 1 In the System Tree. System Manager changes the rule. 2 Click the Replays tab. The Configure Data Instant Replay wizard starts and displays all Replay Profiles. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Choose profiles to attach to the selected volume(s). 3 Select the volume(s) to change. See Also Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 Dell Compellent 71 .Modifying Replay Profiles Change Profiles Attached to a Volume Follow these steps to add a Replay Profile to a volume. 4 Click Configure Data Instant Replay in the main pane. 6 Click Save Configuration to apply the Replay Profiles to the volumes or click Create a New Replay Profile. 2 Click the Volumes tab. A cumulative list of Replay schedules for all selected profiles appears in the bottom frame. select a Replay Profile. 3 Click Convert Now. 1 Select a Replay Profile. 2 From the Shortcut menu. The Replay Profile is changed from Consistent to NonConsistent. 2 From the Shortcut menu. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. System Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles. 3 Click Apply Changes. 1 In the System Tree. you must first detach all associated volumes. showing that the Rule is deleted. Change a Non-Consistent Replay Profile to a Consistent Replay Profile Follow these steps to change a Non-Consistent Profile to a Consistent Profile. The Modify Replay Profile wizard starts. The Rule no longer appears in the Schedule Rules of the Replay Profile. System Manager removes the rule. 5 Click Apply Changes. 1 In the System Tree.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Remove a Rule from a Replay Profile Follow these steps to delete a rule from a Replay Profile. Rename a Replay Profile Follow these steps to change the name of a Replay Profile. showing the new Replay Profile name. Note: Renaming a Replay Profile does not change profile rules. 3 Select a rule to remove from the Replay Profile. The Replay Profile page reappears. enter a new name. The Replay Profile page reappears. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. Change a Consistent Replay Profile to a Non-Consistent Replay Profile Follow these steps to change a Consistent Profile to a Non-Consistent Profile. select Modify. 1 Select a Replay Profile. 1 In the System Tree. The Replay Profile is changed from Non-Consistent to Consistent. 2 Select the Replay Profile attached to the volume to change. 2 In the Name field. select Convert to Non-Consistent Replay Profile. System Manager describes Consistent Replay Profiles. 3 Click Convert Now. 2 From the shortcut menu. select Convert to Consistent Replay Profile. 4 Click Remove Rule. select Modify. 72 Storage Center 6. select the Replay Profile to change. From the shortcut menu. select the Replay Profile to change.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile Before you can delete a profile. click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected Replay. 3 In the main pane. 3 In the main pane. 7 Click Yes. 2 Select a Replay Profile to remove. click the Volumes tab to view a list of volumes that use the selected Replay. A list of Replay Profiles appears. 4 After detaching volumes. 5 From the shortcut menu. 6 Clear the check box of the Replay Profile to detach it from the Volume. Replay Profiles to which the volume is attached are indicated by a check mark in the check box. detach them from the profile. 6 System Manager prompts you to confirm. Delete a Replay Profile Follow these steps to delete a Replay Profile. select the Replay Profile in the System Tree.Modifying Replay Profiles 4 Select a volume. If any volumes appear in the pane. select Storage→ Replay Profiles. The Replay profile is deleted. you can delete the profile. 5 Click Configure Data Instant Replay. System Manager displays volume information. 8 Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for each volume. Note: You cannot delete a Replay Profile created by System Manager or a Replay Profile currently in use by a volume(s). Dell Compellent 73 . When no volumes are attached to the Replay Profile. select Delete. 1 In the System Tree. 7 Click Save Configuration. Replay expiration may take a few minutes. or use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select more than one Replay. Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly Follow these steps to manually expire a Replay without waiting for the expiration date set in the Profile.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 Click the Replays tab. System Manager displays a list of Replays for the volume. depending on the size of the Replay. select Storage→ Volumes and select a volume. Modify Volume Maximums Use this wizard to modify the maximum number of volumes or the maximum configurable volume space allowed for a Replay history.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Working with Replays Replays can be modified. c Check the Unlimited check box to select an unlimited amount of configured volume space. 5 Click Yes. deleted. The Replay is set to be expired. Note: You cannot create additional volumes for a Replay history if the maximum volume count or maximum configurable volume space values have been reached. A list of unexpired Replays for that volume appears. 2 In the main pane. 4 Click OK. and run independently from the schedule. 1 In the System Tree. 74 Storage Center 6. paused. System Manager asks you to confirm. 4 Click Expire. 3 Click Modify Volume Maximums. 3 Select a Replay. 1 In the System Tree. a Modify the Maximum Volume Count. This section describes tasks for managing Replays. b Modify the Maximum Configured Volume Space and select the measurement of size using the drop-down menu. select Storage→ Volumes and select a volume. select the Replays tab. The new Replay appears in the list of Replays for that volume. However. 2 From the shortcut menu. Click Replays. The Create Replay for Volumes wizard starts. hours.Working with Replays Create an Immediate Replay Replays are best used by creating a Replay Profile. Dell Compellent 75 . select Storage→ Replay Profiles. click the Volume tab. attaching it to a volume. A Replay is taken of the volumes you selected. select Replay→ Create Replay. or never. 3 Enter an expiration interval and a description of the Replay. select Storage→ Volumes and select one or more volumes. A list of volumes appears. 4 From the shortcut menu. you can run a Replay manually at any time. 1 In the System Tree. day. 6 Click Create Now. Create an Immediate Replay from a Replay Profile Follow these steps to run a Replay using an existing Replay Profile. 5 Select a volume. and letting System Manager run the Replays on a set schedule. select Create Replay for Volumes. 2 Select a Replay Profile. weeks. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Enter a time for Replays to expire in minutes. 4 Click Create Now. 3 (Optional) To view volumes. 2 Click Continue. no Replays are taken for any volumes. Replays are paused. Follow these steps to resume Replays. System Manager resumes Replays for the volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 The system asks you to confirm. select Replay→ Pause Replay Creation. 1 In the storage tree. The Resume Replay Creation wizard starts. Pausing Replay creation disables both manual and scheduled Replays for all volumes. select Replay→ Resume Replay Creation. Replays are disabled. 76 Storage Center 6.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Pause a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on all volumes. Click Continue. 1 In the Storage Tree. select Volume→ Replay→ Pause Replay Creation. Resume a Replay Creation for the Entire Storage Center When all Replays are paused. select Volume→ Replay→ Resume Replay Creation. 2 Click Continue. click Continue. Pause Replays for an Individual Volume Follow these steps to temporarily stop Replays on a specific volume. the Storage Management menu changes. System Manager resumes Replays. 2 If you are sure you want to disable Replays. While Pause Replay is enabled. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Resume Replays for an Individual Volume A volume for which Replays have been paused appears as a Replay-paused volume. 1 From the Storage Management menu. ) 3 From this page. Orphaned volume histories are deleted. The main pane displays volume information. select Set Display Field. select Volume→ Clean Up Orphaned Replay Histories. The Set Display Field menu appears. • Replay Description — The rule that caused the Replay to be taken. • Expire Time — The time at which each Replay will expire.Working with Replays Clean Up Orphaned Volume Replay Histories Volume histories can become orphaned when the process of deleting a volume is interrupted. When a volume history becomes orphaned. Change Volume Replay Displays Follow these steps to change the Replay information displayed in the main pane. 1 From the Storage Management menu. (This tab appears only if Replays are scheduled for the volume. System Manager asks you if you want to delete the orphaned volume histories. 2 Click the Replay tab. 2 Click OK. The Clean Up Orphaned Replay Histories page appears with a list of orphaned Replays. Eliminate orphaned histories to free up disk space for other volumes. 1 In the System Tree. the disk space it consumes is not released and cannot be used by other volumes. • Replay Size —The size of each Replay. 77 . 4 Choose to display: Dell Compellent • Freeze Time — The time each Replay was taken. select a volume. select a volume. 1 In the System Explorer pane. 78 Storage Center 6.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles View a Volume Replay Calendar Follow these steps to display a graphic schedule of Replay activity. 3 Click Previous Month and Next Month to view previous or projected months. 2 Click the Replay Calendar tab. The System Manager displays the Replay calendar.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Replays are color-coded. Click the arrows to the right of the schedule to change the color of the Replay schedule bar graph. Dell Compellent 79 . 3 Select a Replay. 1 In the System Tree.Recovering Data Recovering Data The purpose of the Replay is to provide a point-in-time copy that you can recover if data is lost or corrupted. 2 Click the Replays tab. select a volume. The Create Volume for Replay wizard starts. This section describes the tasks required to recover data. Create a View Volume Create a View volume from a Replay of the volume in which the file was stored. and then map the volume to a server. From the shortcut menu. A list of Replays for that volume appears. select Create Volume from Replay. 7 Click Create Now. See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115 80 Storage Center 6.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles 4 Accept the default or enter a new name. The volume is created. System Manager asks you to confirm. The Apply Replay Profile page appears. 6 Click Continue.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 8 Click Apply Replay Profile or Skip. The Map Volume to Server wizard starts. 5 Click Create Now. 7 Click Create Now. Dell Compellent 81 . 4 System Manager enters default names for the new volumes. the freeze time. and the amount of time necessary to complete creation of all Replays in the group. 6 System Manager assumes the new volumes will be mapped to the same server as the current volumes. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears. To change the server to which these volumes will be mapped: a Click the expand button next to the Select a Server field. Accept the default or enter a name in the New Volume Name field. Create Volumes from Consistency Groups Follow these steps to create volumes from Consistency Groups. select a Consistent Replay Profile. 5 System Manager assumes the volume folder will be the same as the previous folder. c Click Continue. 2 Click Consistency Group. select a Consistent Replay Profile. b Select a new server. A page appears showing the volumes attached to the group.Recovering Data View Consistency Groups After a consistent Replay has been taken across selected volumes. select Create Volumes for Consistency Groups. 1 In the System Tree. 2 Click Consistency Group. b Select a new volume folder. 1 In the System Tree. c Click Continue. The new volumes appear in the System Tree. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups wizard starts. the group created from the consistent Replay appears in the Consistent Replay window. To change the folder in which these volumes will be created: a Click the expand button next to the New Volume Folder field. The Create Volumes for Consistency Groups page reappears. 3 From the shortcut menu. Chapter 3 Replay Profiles 82 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Field Description Name Name of the profile. Index Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with object identification. Expiration How long the Replay will be saved. System Manager displays the General tab. Replay Creation A Replay applied to more than one volume can be one of the following: Serial: Takes a Replay one volume at a time. Type A Replay Profile can be on of the following: Standard: Predefined by System Manager. See Also Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60 Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 Expire (Delete) a Replay Explicitly on page 74 Dell Compellent 83 . Replays can also be manually expired. Consistent Halts IO to all volumes to which the Replay Profile is attached until Replays are taken for each volume. Parallel: Creates a Replay of all volumes simultaneously. either as assigned by the system or by the person creating the profile. Schedule Specifies when Replays will be taken.User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles User Interface Descriptions for Replay Profiles This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show Replay information. Replay Profile General Tab When you select a specific Replay Profile. Custom: Created by a user. Logical Size Logical size of the volume. Storage Type The standard storage type is Redundant . Field Description Name Name of the volume. Disk Folder Name of the disk folder associated with the volume.Chapter 3 Replay Profiles Replay Profile Volumes Tab The Volumes tab in the Replay Profile window lists all volumes currently using the selected Replay.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Consumed Disk Space Amount of space used for the replay.2 MB. • Replay Enabled: A volume that has at least one Replay (see page 48). See Also Applying Replay Profiles to Volumes on page 60 Creating Replay Profiles on page 62 Change Profiles Attached to a Volume on page 71 Detach Volumes from a Replay Profile on page 72 84 Storage Center 6. Volume Type A Volume Type may be one of the following: • Dynamic Write: A volume for which no Replays have been taken (see page 48). . . . . . . 90 Creating and Editing a QoS Definition . Contents Setting up an External Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 User Interface Reference for QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Dell Compellent 85 . . you must create External Device objects in the Disk node of the System Tree. . . . . . . . and create a QoS definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Importing from an External Device . or to migrate and mirror data between Storage Center and a remote disk. 86 Mapping an External Device to a Server . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Import Thin Import is used to copy data from remote disks to Storage Center. . . . . . . . . . . . To use the Import options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note: Data replication between Storage Centers is managed using Enterprise Manager. . 86 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 4 Import Setting up an External Device To import data to a Storage Center you must have the required amount of disk space classified as an External Device. select an unmanaged disk. 3 Enter a name. which can only be done if the disk is unmanaged. The Classify Disk as External Device dialog box appears. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. You may choose to name this disk to indicate from where the data was imported. select Classify Disk as External Device. Upon completion.Setting up an External Device 4 Click Classify Now. See Also Release a Managed Disk on page 200 Dell Compellent 87 . external devices can be found in the External Devices folder under the Disks node in System Explorer view. 3 Click Continue. When an HBA is added. 4 Select the QoS Definition to use or create a new definition. 88 Storage Center 6. A summary page appears. or if necessary. create a server or cluster. Note: If you map an external device to a server that does not have a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) available.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 1 In the System Tree. right-click on an unmapped external device and select Map External Device to Server from the menu. 2 Select a server in the list. the server will not detect the external device. the mapped external device will appear at the server. 5 Click Continue. The Map External Device to Server wizard starts. The QoS definition page appears.Chapter 4 Import Mapping an External Device to a Server Map the external device to a server to allow the server to see the external device. Mapping an External Device to a Server 6 Click Map Device Now. select the external device in the System Tree. See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115 Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Dell Compellent 89 . 7 To view the mapping details. and click the Mapping tab in the main window. The Thin Import from External Device wizard starts. Changes made to the source during the copy process are copied to the destination volume. 1 Right-click on an External Device and select Thin Import from External Device from the shortcut menu. the copied data resides on the destination volume. Copy does not dynamically update the destination volume after the copy is complete. Note: Mappings between the source volume and the original server should be removed before starting a Thin Import.Chapter 4 Import Importing from an External Device When you import data. 90 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The import process can be monitored using the System Manager View menu or on the Volume properties Import tab until the import is entirely synchronized. 2 Select the type of Thin Import to perform: • Copy: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. and the destination volume is mapped to the Storage Center server. Storage Center uses thin provisioning to migrate data to the specified volume. When complete. cautioning you about the space the import process will occupy. A Warning screen may appear. • Copy/Migrate: Copies data from the source device to the destination volume. The next page displays a list of volumes. 5 Click Continue. 4 In the Volume list. Dell Compellent 91 .Importing from an External Device 3 Click Continue. select an existing volume or click Create Volume to create a new volume. Follow the Create Volume wizard and return to this step. The QoS Definition page appears. Note: Importing data from an external device requires the Storage Center to read all blocks of the entire size of the volume. Depending on RAID selection this may consume up to two times the storage of the volume on your Storage Center. 7 Click Continue. Follow the Create QoS wizard and return to this step.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 92 Storage Center 6. This saves significant space for many sparse data sets.Chapter 4 Import 6 Select the QoS definition for the import process or click Create QoS Definition if the required definition does not exist. and the data being written is all zeros. Thin import works by not writing data if no previous page exists for the data in question. During the Import. The final page displays all the selected information for verification. 8 Click Import Now to start the process. information about the process is shown in the Volume Import tab and in the View→ Import tab. Importing from an External Device Dell Compellent 93 . and the import Type on the View→ Import window changes to Mirror to External Device. • Copy–Migrate: the Import tab remains on the Volume properties page. you can reallocate the disk space by deleting the External Devices node.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . See Also Create a Volume on page 17 Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 94 Storage Center 6. or if you do not need to retain the connection to the source. 11 If data was migrated to Storage Center. You can leave it in this state. System Manager proceeds in different ways depending on whether the Import was a Copy or a Copy–Migrate.Chapter 4 Import 9 After the Import. delete the record from the View→ Import window and reallocate the disks in the External Devices node. 10 If data was copied to Storage Center. the data is mirrored back to its source. • Copy: The Import tab is removed from the Volume properties and the record is removed from the View→ Import window. select the Link Speed that most closely represents your link or select Other to enter the appropriate link speed. 8 Enter a Name for the QoS Definition. Dell Compellent 95 . 4 Set the Number of Links. enter that number. 5 Click Continue. 7 Click Continue. The Create Replication QoS Definition wizard starts. QoS definitions you create here are displayed as QoS options in the wizard and also on the properties tab of existing replications. 1 In the System Tree. a To create a bandwidth limit schedule. and (optionally) notes that describe the definition. expand the Remote Systems node.Creating and Editing a QoS Definition Creating and Editing a QoS Definition Importing data requires a Quality of Service (QoS) definition to specify a link speed and the amount of bandwidth that replications are allowed to use for the data import. The percentage and hours bandwidth will be limited are displayed. 2 Right click on QoS Definitions and select Create QoS Definition. If you have more than one link to the remote Storage Center. b Click and drag the mouse pointer down and to the right to select days and hours. 9 Click Create Now. click Yes. Create a New QoS Definition The Create Replication QoS Definition wizard steps you through the process for defining a QoS definition. c Select a percentage bandwidth limit. 3 In the first page of the wizard. This setting defines link attributes only. Use bandwidth limiting only in cases where the link is shared with other traffic. 6 For replications to use all bandwidth on the link at all times. If you click No. The QoS is created. skip the remainder of this step. This setting distributes link resources. Bandwidth limiting incurs additional system overhead and is inherently less bandwidth efficient. This adjusts the maximum bandwidth allowed without changing the communication link settings. The System Manager asks if you want to perform bandwidth limiting. click No. 4 (Optional) Click Advanced to change Advanced Chopper Settings. 5 (Optional) Click the Notes tab to change or add QoS properties notes. The QoS Definition Properties dialog box appears. Type (QoS definition). Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should modified only under the guidance of Dell Technical Support Services. change any of the following: QoS name. select Properties. 2 From the QoS shortcut menu.Chapter 4 Import See Also Set Advanced Options on page 97 Edit QoS Definition Properties Use the QoS Properties to change settings in the QoS definition. select a QoS definition. 1 In the System Tree. See the table on page 103 for descriptions of these settings. Link Speed.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 96 Storage Center 6. Number of Links. 3 On the General tab. click Continue to proceed to the next page in the wizard. 1 Display the Advanced Chopper Settings for a QoS Definition: • Right-click on an existing QoS definition and select Properties. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box. 3 Save the new settings: • If you are editing an existing definition.Creating and Editing a QoS Definition Set Advanced Options Use Advanced Chopper Settings to adjust IO parameters for specific requirements as recommended by Dell Technical Support Services. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103 Dell Compellent 97 . then click the Advanced tab: • Create a new QoS definition. • If you are creating a new QoS definition. Note: Advanced Chopper Settings should be modified only under the guidance of Dell Technical Support Services. and in the first page of Create Replication QoS Definition wizard. 2 Adjust the values as recommended by Dell Technical Support Services. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 98 Storage Center 6.Chapter 4 Import User Interface Reference for QoS This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show or modify QoS information. Notes Optional notes about the volume.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Each tab provides information about the volume. Link Speed Speed of the QoS link. KBs Per Second Amount of data transported per second. QoS General Tab Selecting a QoS in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top. IOs Per Second Number of IO requests completed per second. The QoS General tab provides an overview of the selected QoS. Date Created / Date Updated Date of creation/update and by whom. Setting Description Name Name of the QoS definition. User Interface Reference for QoS QoS Limit Tab The QoS Limit tab displays the bandwidth limit percent and the time in hours that the limit is in place. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 Dell Compellent 99 . Chapter 4 Import QoS Advanced Tab The QoS Advanced Tab displays the current Advanced Chopper Settings. Global Maximum Number of Sectors Total number of outstanding sectors allowed. Destination Maximum Number of IOs Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab on page 103 100 Storage Center 6. Setting Description Global Maximum Sectors Per IO Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request. Maximum Sectors Per Queue Pass Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass through the system queue. Maximum IOs Per Queue Pass Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system queue. Destination Maximum Number of Sectors Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination. Global Maximum Number of IOs Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed. User Interface Reference for QoS QoS Definition Replications Tab The Replications tab lists replications that use the selected QoS definition. Dell Compellent Field Description Replication Name Name of the replication Source Volume Name of the source volume for the replication Replication State Up or Down Remote System Storage Center to which the replication was made Percentage Synced Status of the Asynchronous replication as a percentage Remaining Amount of data remaining to be synched Current Replay Date and time of current Replay being replicated (or active Replay) Replicate Active Replay Whether the active Replay is being replicated Deduplication Whether Deduplication is active Using Live Volume Whether the replication is using Live Volume QoS Definition Name of QoS definition used by the replication 101 . Setting Description Name Name of the QoS definition Type QoS Definition Link Speed Speed of the QoS link. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 102 Storage Center 6.Chapter 4 Import QoS Definition Properties General Tab The General Properties tab allows you to view and edit QoS Definition properties.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Number of Links Number of links to the remote Storage Center. Dell Compellent Setting Description Global Maximum Sectors Per IO Number of sectors to transfer in a single I/O request. outstanding I/Os are limited. Destination Maximum Number of IOs Number of outstanding I/Os allowed per destination.User Interface Reference for QoS QoS Definition Properties Advanced Tab The QoS Properties Advanced Tab allows you to adjust the Advanced Chopper Settings. Global Maximum Number of Sectors Total number of outstanding sectors allowed. The iSCSI protocol limits the number of outstanding requests to 64. This setting is related to the execution throttle set in the HBA. so setting this value any higher will have no effect on iSCSI transports. Global Maximum Number of IOs Total number of outstanding I/O requests allowed. If this value is set too high. 103 . if sectors per I/O multiplied by the number of I/Os is greater than this value. Larger values cause less data "chopping" and larger “chunks” of data will be sent on the wire. This setting determines the total amount of data on the wire at any given time. the target side's write cache may be bypassed. This number determines the maximum size of an I/O request. Chapter 4 Import Setting Description Destination Maximum Number of Sectors Number of outstanding sectors allowed per destination. Maximum IOs Per Queue Pass Number of I/Os allowed at each pass through the system queue. and so on. Maximum Sectors Per Queue Pass Number of sectors allowed to a destination at each pass through the system queue. then the second. Smaller values ensure that all volumes to a destination get serviced often. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 104 Storage Center 6. This setting is relevant on a per destination basis. See Also Create a New QoS Definition on page 95 Edit QoS Definition Properties on page 96 QoS Definition Properties Notes Tab The QoS Properties Notes Tab allows you to add notes about the QoS Definition. outstanding I/Os are serviced from the first volume. If there are multiple volumes to a single destination. Smaller values increase fairness at the expense of CPU utilization.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . until this number is reached. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 User Interface Reference for Servers . . . . . . . 115 Managing Virtual Servers . . . . . . . . . . 110 Managing Server Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Managing Server Folders . . . . 107 Managing Single Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Using Topology Explorer Server Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Dell Compellent 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Servers This chapter describes how to connect and manage servers in Storage Center. . . . . 106 Server Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Managing HBAs . . • Context menu commands customarily displayed near the top of the System Explorer window are disabled. Icon Server Type Server Node — all servers Server Folder FluidFS Server Server 106 Storage Center 6. For information about managing FluidFS servers and server clusters. One server or server cluster can be the host of one or more virtual servers. see your FluidFS product documentation. volumes can be mapped to it.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Therefore.Chapter 5 Servers Introduction Defining a server enables Storage Center to pass IO through the ports on that server. The Storage Center views each virtual server as a separate entity. See Also Shortcut Menu on page 7 Server Icons In the System Tree. Volumes can be mapped to the server cluster or to a server that is a member of the cluster. the System Manager uses icons to denote the server type. After a server is created. Volumes mapped to one virtual server are not mapped to other virtual servers residing on the same server. Each virtual server can have a different operating system. Servers can be organized into server folders either to make them easier to manage or as a means to restrict access to servers. The Storage Center views the server cluster as one server. See Also Managing Server Clusters on page 115 Create a Virtual Server on page 124 Users and User Groups on page 297 Restrictions for Servers Created by FluidFS Servers and server clusters created using the FluidFS file system cannot be modified or deleted using Storage Center System Manager. for these server types: • Shortcut menus customarily displayed when right-clicking on a server or server cluster are disabled. Several servers can be combined into a server cluster. Information displayed depends on the server configuration. such as: Dell Compellent • Server with HBA ports of different transport types (such as Fibre Channel and iSCSI) • Server with multiple server HBA ports • Clustered server • Virtual server • Server whose operating system supports multi-pathing 107 .Server Mapping Icon Server Type Server Cluster FluidFS Server Cluster Virtual Server Server Mapping Server mapping details are shown in the main window by selecting a server in the System Tree and clicking the Mapping tab. 2 Click the Mapping tab. • Virtual Servers: If the server selected is a virtual server. select a server. type of volume. See Also Set Mapping Volume Defaults on page 324. select a server. and the logical size of the volume. View Details about Volumes Mapped to a Server Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to the server. 2 Click the Volumes tab. • Advanced Mapping Details: You can view advanced mapping details only if your user volume default settings permit you to do so. System Manager displays the volumes that are mapped to this server. select a server. Server information appears. 108 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree.Chapter 5 Servers View Server Mapping The server Mapping tab shows the mapping between volumes and servers. Select a volume to view details about the way that volume is mapped to the server or server cluster. Server information appears. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . the amount of disk space consumed by the volume. Mapping information appears. Information includes whether the volume is mapped to the virtual server. the Mapping tab displays which volumes are mapped to the virtual server. server cluster. the host server of the virtual server. View Volumes Mapped to a Server Use the Volumes tab to see a list of volumes that are connected to a specific server. 1 In the System Tree. or virtual server. whether the volume is redundant. 2 Click the Mapping tab. including volume name. or mapped to both. including cluster node information. The Mapping tab shows the volumes to which the server is mapped and a mapping grid that shows additional Mapping Details about the manner in which the volume is mapped to the server. writes.Server Mapping View Volumes Mapped to a Remote System Use the Mapping tab to display details about volumes that are mapped to a remote system. Dell Compellent • The top of the chart displays reads. 1 In the System Tree. View Server Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. If the server selected is a remote system. 2 Click on the Charts tab. the Mapping displays the volumes that are mapped to that remote system. and total IO per second 109 . writes. Select a volume to view details about the way that volume is mapped to the remote system. select a server. and total KB per second • The bottom of the chart displays reads. add remote CHAP initiators to communicate with the server. 1 In the System Tree. select Create Server.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select Servers. Create a Server The Create Server wizard guides you through the process of creating a server. see Add a Remote CHAP Initiator on page 174. The wizard lists Host Bus Adapters (HBAs) recognized by the Storage Center. 110 • Check boxes near the bottom of the page allow you to filter HBA connections displayed on this page. If you are using iSCSI CHAP. 2 From the shortcut menu. The Create Server wizard starts. • Buttons at the bottom of the page allow you to select from various actions: Storage Center 6.Chapter 5 Servers Managing Single Servers Creating a server means to identify it to a Storage Center using the Create Server wizard. A page allowing you to name the server appears. If new HBAs are detected. check the connection between the server and the controller. • If Yes. 3 Select one or more HBAs. and click Scan Again. if not. or fiber cables. 1 Select the transport type (Fibre Chanel or iSCSI). If you select an iSCSI HBA. and click Continue. • If No. plug your server into the network. 2 Enter a WWN or iSCSI name for the HBA. Dell Compellent 111 . 5 Enter a name for the server or accept the default. Default is iSCSI Name. and click Continue. 3 Click Continue. wait 30 seconds. Find HBA helps you find the servers currently on the network or servers to be added to the network. the screen will display the message "# Host Bus Adapters have been detected” (where # is a number). HBAs. wait 30 seconds. 1 Enter the static IP address of the HBA port. If new HBAs are still not detected. 4 Click Continue. you have the option to create the server using WWNs or iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. The HBA is added to the list of available HBAs. • If new HBAs are not detected. If your server is already connected to the network click Yes. 6 Enter a folder name. click No.Managing Single Servers Button Actions Define HBA by IP This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has not yet been connected to a Storage Center. unplug your server from the network. 2 Click Continue. Manually Define HBA Find HBA This page of the wizard allows you to manually define an HBA port that has not yet been connected to a Storage Center. there is a problem with your network. 9 Click Continue. On the next page.Chapter 5 Servers 7 (Optional) Add notes. A page is displayed showing rules for the selected operating system. When System Manager is refreshed. select from the following options: • Map the server to a Volume • Map a different Server to a Volume • Create Volume • Create Server 11 Click Close to exit the wizard Note: For a short time after a server is created. Click the question mark icon. it may appear in the System Tree with an error icon while Storage Center re-evaluates its server connectivity. select an operating system (OS) for the server. The page displays the name and attributes of the server.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Note: Volumes are mapped to servers according to the rules of the server operating system. 8 From the drop-down menu. the error icon disappears when the server is visible to Storage Center. 112 Storage Center 6. 10 Click Create Now. Expand operating system folders to view operating system versions. All servers must have an OS defined. 1 In the System Tree. you may need to change the operating system of the server in Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree. 2 From the shortcut menu. This tab shows the server name and operating system. The operating system of that server is changed. The server is renamed. 5 Click OK. select a server. The Server Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. 4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab. 3 Enter a new name. Dell Compellent 113 . Change the Operating System of a Server If an operating system on a server changes because of an operating system upgrade or operating system capability changes from single path to multi-path. select Properties.Managing Single Servers Rename a Server Use the Server Properties dialog box to change a server name. 2 From the shortcut menu. select a server. 5 Click OK. The Server Properties dialog box appears with the General tab selected. select Properties. 3 Select a new operating system. 4 (Optional) Enter notes on the Info tab. The mapping is removed.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Make sure that the volume mapped to this server is no longer mounted. 2 From the shortcut menu. • Make sure that removing this mapping will not create a gap in the LUN sequence. select Remove Mappings from a Server. • Deleting a server node within a server cluster deletes only that server node. or select a server and remove volumes mapped to it. select a server. This command is similar for servers. 2 From the shortcut menu. When deleting a server. System Manager asks you to confirm. select Delete. server clusters. Storage Center 6. The server is deleted. 1 In the System Tree. select a server. and virtual servers. • Deleting a server that is part of a virtual server deletes only that server. System Manager warns you if you are attempting to remove an active map entry. 1 In the System Tree. Most operating systems require contiguous LUN sequencing starting with LUN 0. 4 Click Remove Now. System Manager displays volumes mapped to that server. be aware of the following: 114 • Deleting a server cluster deletes all the servers within the cluster. A gap in the LUN sequence may cause the server to fail to recognize subsequent volumes. the server using the volume will have read/write errors. 3 Click Yes. 3 Select mappings to remove. If you remove an active map entry. Delete a Server Deleting a server returns HBAs connected to that server to the list of available HBAs.Chapter 5 Servers Remove Mappings from a Server You can either select a volume and remove the mapping to the server. When creating a server cluster. Volumes can be mapped directly to a server cluster. Storage Center attempts to map an included volume to the same LUN on all cluster servers. Volumes can also be mapped to only one of the nodes within the server cluster. A server that is a member of a server cluster is referred to as a cluster node. Some operating systems require that a volume mapped to multiple cluster nodes use the same LUN on each node. The Select a Server page appears. All servers within a server cluster must have the same operating system. IO continues to other servers within the cluster. select Create Server Cluster.Managing Server Clusters Managing Server Clusters A server cluster is a collection of servers. Create a Server Cluster Use the Create Server Cluster wizard to create a server cluster. If the LUN selected is not available on a particular server. 2 From the shortcut menu. The Create Server Cluster wizard starts. select Servers. All volumes mapped to a server cluster are automatically mapped to all nodes in the cluster. if one server fails. 1 In the System Tree. the mapping is not performed and the volume is only partially connected to the cluster. 3 Click Add Existing Server. This increases IO efficiency and. Dell Compellent 115 . Note: All servers in the server cluster must have the same operating system. click Continue. The original Create Server Cluster page reappears.Chapter 5 Servers 4 Expand a server folder to view servers within the folder. 9 (Optional) Add notes. if necessary. If a server is incorrectly selected to be in a cluster. 8 Name the server cluster or accept the default. 7 After you have added all the servers to the server cluster. A page opens that allows you to name the server cluster. and select a server. 116 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . click Remove Selected Server to remove the server from the list before creating the server cluster. The page also displays the operating systems of the selected servers. The Create Server Cluster page reappears with the servers listed under Selected Servers. 6 Add another server by clicking Add Existing Server again. 5 Click Continue. 11 Click Continue. System Manager selects all volumes mapped to the server nodes. 12 Click Continue. System Manager displays volumes mapped to cluster nodes and asks you to select the volumes you want to map to the cluster. 13 From the next page.Managing Server Clusters 10 Click Continue. by default. Notice that the server cluster appears in the System Tree. Dell Compellent 117 . except boot volumes. System Manager displays a list of mapped volumes and asks you to select volumes to map to server cluster. If volumes were mapped to individual server nodes. boot volumes are not selected to be mapped to the server cluster. By default. The system asks you to confirm. map volumes or click Close. System Manager asks you to confirm. select Add Server to Cluster. Volumes that were mapped to the server cluster are now mapped to the server that was added. 16 Click Continue. The Create Server Cluster wizard starts. select Create Server Cluster. 2 Select a server cluster. System Manager displays a new page showing your server cluster creation choices. The Add Server to Cluster wizard starts showing a list of server clusters. 17 Click Create Now to create the cluster or click Back to make changes. 4 Finish the Create Server Cluster wizard. you will return the Create Server Cluster wizard. you can create it from within the Create Server Cluster wizard. select a server that is a not a member of a server cluster. 3 Click Create New Server and follow the Create Server wizard.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 From the shortcut menu. See Also Create a Server on page 110 Create a Server Cluster on page 115 Add a Server to Cluster Use the Add Server to Cluster wizard to add one server or multiple servers to a server cluster. 4 Click Apply Now. 1 In the System Tree.Chapter 5 Servers 14 In the Name field. When finished. From the shortcut menu. 3 Click Continue. 118 Storage Center 6. enter a name or accept the default. select Servers. 1 In the System Tree. Create a New Server for a Server Cluster If a server to be added to the cluster does not exist in Storage Center. 15 (Optional) Add notes. select Remove Servers from Cluster. select a server cluster. System Manager asks you to confirm. Remove a Single Server Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete a server from a cluster. select Remove Servers from Cluster. 1 In the System Tree.Managing Server Clusters Remove a Server from Cluster Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to remove one server or multiple servers from a server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu. From the shortcut menu. System Manager displays a list of servers that are members of this cluster. select a server that is a member of a server cluster. removing a server from a cluster does not affect volumes mapped to the cluster. Because volumes mapped to the server cluster are mapped to all servers within the cluster. 4 Click Remove Now. Remove Multiple Servers Use the Remove Servers from Cluster wizard to delete multiple servers from a cluster. Click Continue. 3 Select one or more servers to remove. Dell Compellent 119 . 1 In the System Tree. The Remove Servers from Cluster wizard starts. 2 Click Remove Now. 5 Enter a name for the cluster node and select all server HBA ports that belong to the cluster node. the Convert to Server Cluster option is not displayed. A list of available server ports and defined cluster nodes is displayed. 6 Click Add Cluster Node. you will be able to proceed with server cluster creation. 120 Storage Center 6.5. select a single server. The Convert to Server Cluster wizard guides you through the process of splitting an existing single server cluster definition into its individual cluster nodes. The Convert to Server Cluster wizard starts. the wizard displays information about the cluster nodes to be created and the server HBA ports for each node. After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. 7 Click Convert Now to complete server cluster creation. a server cluster may have been represented by a single server definition containing the server ports for all nodes in the cluster. 3 Click Continue. volume maps will be moved automatically to each node without disrupting server IO.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 5 Servers Convert a Server to a Server Cluster In Server Clusters created using Storage Center software versions prior to version 5. In the current version you can define each physical cluster node individually and then group them into a server cluster. 4 Click Add Cluster Node to add an additional node to the cluster and select the server ports for that cluster node. You can then easily map volumes directly to the cluster to make them visible to each cluster node. After all available ports have been assigned to a cluster node. After cluster nodes are defined. select Convert to Server Cluster. Note: If the selected server is already a member of a server cluster. Dell Compellent 121 . 4 Click Continue. select a server cluster. The resulting page displays the volume selected for promotion and the name of the server cluster to which it will be mapped. select Promote Mappings to Server Cluster. 1 In the System Tree. The Promote Mappings to Cluster wizard starts. 3 Select the mapping to promote by highlighting it. it can be promoted from that server node to a server cluster. 2 From the shortcut menu.Managing Server Clusters Promote Server Cluster Mappings After a volume has been mapped to a server node. 5 Click Promote Now to promote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit. all server mappings are selected.Chapter 5 Servers Demote Server Cluster Mappings After a volume has been mapped to a server cluster. 122 Storage Center 6. • Cleared server mappings will be deleted from the server. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Click Demote Now to demote volume mappings or click Cancel to exit. 3 Select the check boxes of the mappings to be demoted. • Selected server mappings will be demoted from the cluster to the server. it can be demoted from that server cluster to a server node. The Demote Mappings to Cluster Nodes wizard starts showing current mappings. By default. select a server cluster. select Demote Mappings to Server Cluster Nodes. The next page lists servers in the cluster and the volumes that are mapped to the servers.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 4 Click Continue. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 Make sure all nodes that were part of the cluster are removed or deleted. Dell Compellent 123 . select Delete. you must remove or delete all the server nodes within the server cluster. In the System Tree.Managing Server Clusters Delete a Server Cluster Before you can delete a server cluster. 3 Click Yes to confirm. 2 From the shortcut menu. System Manager asks you to confirm. select an empty server cluster. A list of available HBAs appears.Chapter 5 Servers Managing Virtual Servers You can create a new server as a virtual server or you can convert a physical server to a virtual server. 7 (Optional) Add notes. 1 In the System Tree. A page allowing you to name virtual server appears. click Continue. 8 Click Continue. 3 If you know the HBA(s) for the selected server. 6 From the drop-down menu. select Create Virtual Server. select an operating system that can act as an OS for a virtual machine. Create a Virtual Server Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to select all server HBAs for the new server.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select a server. There is no limit on the number of virtual servers you can create on a server. 2 From the shortcut menu. A confirmation page appears. 124 Storage Center 6. The virtual server appears under the host server you selected. select either Manually Define HBA or Find HBA and follow the instructions. 9 Click Create Now. If not. such as Windows 2008. select it by clicking the check box to the left of the HBA(s) name. 4 After you have selected or defined the HBA(s). 5 Enter a name or accept the default. 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 Click Convert Now. select a server. Dell Compellent 125 . select Convert to Virtual Server. Note: The destination server or server cluster must be running an operating system that can act as a virtual server host.Managing Virtual Servers Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server Use the Create Virtual Server wizard to convert a physical server to a virtual server. 3 In the System Tree. select a server or server cluster. such as VMWare ESX or Windows 2008. System Manager asks you to select a host server or server cluster for the selected servers. Click Continue. 1 In the System Tree. A confirmation page appears. The clustered server is converted to a virtual server. select a virtual server. Delete a Virtual Host Server Follow these step to delete a virtual host server. The Convert Virtual Server to Physical Server wizard starts. 126 Storage Center 6. select Convert to Physical Server. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select a virtual host server. 2 From the shortcut menu. Only the server you converted to a physical server is removed from the virtual server group. 2 From the shortcut menu. The virtual host server and all virtual servers attached to the host are deleted. 3 Click Convert Now. 1 In the System Tree. 3 Click Yes. The other virtual servers remain virtual.Chapter 5 Servers Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server Use the Convert to Physical Server wizard to convert a virtual server to a physical server. System Manager warns you that deleting a virtual host server also deletes all virtual servers attached to the host. select Delete. Folders appear in the System Tree under the servers node. System Manager asks you to confirm. 1 In the System Tree. Dell Compellent 127 . 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. 5 Click Create Now. System Manager displays the server and the folder path.Managing Server Folders Managing Server Folders Use server folders to organize and to control access to servers. select one or more servers. 3 Click Continue. Add Servers to a Server Folder Use the shortcut menu options to move servers to a folder. 1 In the System Tree. 2 Select a folder to which to move the server. 3 Enter a name or accept the default. The Create Server Folder wizard starts. 5 Click Move Now. Server folders can be hierarchical. select Create Server Folder. Create a Server Folder Use the Create Server Folder wizard to create folders. Move Servers to a Different Folder Use the shortcut menu options to move servers from one folder to another folder. select a server. 4 (Optional) Enter notes. select Move to Folder. 3 Select a folder. 1 In the System Tree. From the shortcut menu. select Move to Folder. 4 Click Continue. 4 Click Move Now. The Move Servers wizard starts. select Servers. displaying server folders. System Manager displays a list of folders. • Wait 60 seconds. check the cabling and connections and click Scan Again. 128 Storage Center 6. • Wait 30 seconds • Click Continue. Click Continue. Note: If Storage Center does not recognize the new HBA. • • If you click Yes. The Add HBAs to Server wizard starts. Find an HBA The find HBA option requires physical access to the server ports. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select Add HBAs to Server.Chapter 5 Servers Managing HBAs Use these tasks to locate. 2 Click Find HBA. • Plug the cable going to the HBA back into the server. System Manager asks you to make sure that the network acknowledges the HBA. • Select an HBA. If you click No: • Plug the server into the FC Network or create a connection by logging on to the iSCSI portal. select a server. System Manager asks if the server is already cabled to the network. • Click Find HBA again. • Locate and unplug the cable to the HBA on the back of the server. add. The system asks you to confirm. From the shortcut menu. and delete HBAs in the Storage Center. Note: When you click Refresh. it merely re-displays the current list of HBAs. 6 Click Modify Now. In the Connected Controller Ports column. System Manager asks you to confirm. or only Up connections. 5 Click Continue. you can logically identify it to the Storage Center using the Add HBAs to Server wizard. System Manager lists the server ports connected to this controller. System Manager does not scan for new HBAs. 4 Select an HBA. 2 From the shortcut menu. 3 Select the HBAs you want to display: FC. 1 In the System Tree. select Add HBAs to Server. Note: If you select an iSCSI HBA. iSCSI. Default is iSCSI Qualified Name. Dell Compellent 129 . you have the option to create the server using WWNs or iSCSI Qualified Names (IQNs) for HBAs. The Add HBAs to Server wizard starts.Managing HBAs Add HBAs to a Server from a List If you add a new card to a server. select a server. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Add HBAs to Server page appears. 6 Click Continue. The HBA you entered is shown in the list of HBAs. 130 Storage Center 6. 7 Click Modify Now. 1 In the System Tree. select a server. select Add HBAs to Server. A summary page appears. 5 Select the HBA you defined. The HBA is added to the server. From the shortcut menu. 3 Select a Transport Type and enter a World Wide Name or iSCSI name for the HBA.Chapter 5 Servers Manually Define an HBA Use the Add HBA to Server wizard to define an HBA that does not appear in the list. 2 In the Add HBA to Server wizard. click Manually Define HBA. 4 Click Continue. Delete an HBA Follow these steps to delete an HBA from the System Tree. 5 Click Remove HBAs Now. the maps are also deleted. 4 Click Continue. System Manager displays the HBAs on that server. 3 Select an HBA. 3 Right-click on a server port and select Remove HBA. select Remove HBAs from Server. System Manager asks you to confirm. select a server. 1 In the System Tree. you are really mapping that volume to one (or possibly more than one) of the server HBAs. If you remove an active HBA. Dell Compellent 131 . 2 Click the Server HBAs tab. the server that is using the volume no longer has access to that volume and will receive read or write errors.Managing HBAs Remove HBAs from a Server Before removing an HBA. make sure that no volumes are mounted to this server through this HBA. 1 In the System Tree. Note: When an HBA is removed from a server. any mapping through those HBA ports will be automatically reevaluated and moved to other HBA ports on the server if any are available. When you map a volume to a server. 2 From the shortcut menu. The HBA is removed. When you remove an HBA to which a volume is mapped. 4 Click Remove HBA Now. System Manager asks you to confirm. select a server. shows server port information. Note: A Server Connectivity Report appears only if the Storage Center does not have Virtual Ports.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 1 From the View menu. The server connectivity information appears. The left side lists: • WorldWide Name (WWN) • Name of server • Type of server • Port type of FC or iSCSI 2 Scroll to the right to view additional information for each server. 132 Storage Center 6.Chapter 5 Servers View a Server Connectivity Report The Server Connectivity report. select Server Connectivity. including WWN and fault domain. available in the View menu. • Create New Server Folder starts the Create Server Folder wizard. The left column displays servers. The Topology Explorer is divided into three columns. When the Topology Explorer displays folders. Numbers that appear on the connection lines between servers and volumes indicate the logical unit for the mapping. From the View menu.Using Topology Explorer Server Functions Using Topology Explorer Server Functions Use Topology Explorer to map volumes to servers and external (remote) Storage Centers easily by dragging components. When the Folders button is toggled to show folders. If there are Replications. toggles between showing all connections and showing connections only for selected objects. • The Folders button. toggles between showing and hiding volume folders. The following two server functions are available through Topology Explorer command objects: • Create New Server object starts the Create Server wizard. and the right column displays external (remote) Storage Centers. The middle column displays volumes. select Topology Explorer. • The Connections button. See Also Using the Topology Explorer on page 45 Dell Compellent 133 . a red line is drawn through the Folders button and unmapped folders are displayed. located to the right of the Connections button. there will also be connection lines between volumes and the remote volumes to which they are Replicating. two additional command objects appear at the bottom of the window: Create New Server Folder and Create New Volume Folder. located above the right column. Chapter 5 Servers Create a New Server with the Topology Explorer Use the mouse to drag and drop a server into a Storage Center network.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 Follow the instructions described in Create a Server Folder on page 127. The Create Server wizard starts. 2 Follow the instructions described on Managing Single Servers on page 110. Create a New Server Folder with the Topology Explorer Use the mouse to drag and drop a server folder 1 Make sure the Show Folders toggle is enabled and the Show Folder command object appears. 1 Drag the New Server command object to the Topology Explorer. 134 Storage Center 6. 2 Drag the New Server Folder command object to the Topology Explorer. The Create New Server Folder wizard starts. or server cluster. See Also Rename a Server on page 113 Dell Compellent 135 . Operating System Operating system of the server.User Interface Reference for Servers User Interface Reference for Servers This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show server information. Date Date server was created/updated and by whom. Field Description Name Name of server. Index Number used by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with object identification. Connectivity Connection status of the server. applied when server was created. Notes Optional notes. frequently blank. the folder in which it resides. virtual server. Server Information General Tab System Manager displays general and detailed information about each server connected to Storage Center in the General tab. Folder If the server is organized into a folder. Type Server. Field Description Type May be FC or iSCSI. Server Port IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC. Connected Controller Ports Address of connected controller ports. node name.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . and other identifying information. Port Information Port ID. Status Status of the server port.Chapter 5 Servers Server HBAs Tab The Server HBA tab displays information about the HBAs used to communicate between the server and the Storage Center. Connectivity Connection status of the server port. See Also Find an HBA on page 128 Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129 Manually Define an HBA on page 130 Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131 Delete an HBA on page 131 136 Storage Center 6. Note: The preceding figure shows sample connectivity information for Fibre Channel. The upper portion of the pane shows information about the Server HBA.User Interface Reference for Servers Server Connectivity Tab The server Connectivity tab displays information about individual HBAs connected to the Storage Center across controller ports and fault domains. Field Description Controller Port IQN or WWN for iSCSI and WWN for FC. this pane also displays the IP address. and gateway. For iSCSI. Controller Controller name associated with the port. Type Virtual Port or Physical port. subnet mask. Status Status of the server port. See Also Find an HBA on page 128 Add HBAs to a Server from a List on page 129 Remove HBAs from a Server on page 131 Dell Compellent 137 . but typically covers these fields.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Controller Port WWN of the controller port to which the volume is mapped. Field Description Volume Name of the volume to which the server is mapped. Information displayed depends on the server configuration. LUN Logical unit number assigned (if applicable). Read Only Indicates whether the advanced option is set to make the volume Read Only.Chapter 5 Servers Server Mapping Tab The server Mapping tab lists the volumes to which it is mapped and shows the mapping details. See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 Map a Volume to Remote System on page 26 Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114 138 Storage Center 6. Server Name of the server to which the volume is mapped. Type Transport type: FC or iSCSI. Status Indicates whether the link is Up or Down. Server Port WWN of the server port to which the volume is mapped. Consumed Disk Space Amount of disk space used. Storage Type Default is 2 MB Redundant. Mapped Via Mapping path.User Interface Reference for Servers Server Volumes Tab The server Volumes tab shows information about the volumes mapped to the server. Field Description Name Name of the volume. Disk Folder Folder the volume uses for storage (if any). Logical Size Size of the volume. See Also Map a Volume to a Server on page 24 View Volumes Mapped to a Server on page 108 Remove Mappings from a Server on page 114 Dell Compellent 139 . • Replay Enabled: Volume for which a Replay has been taken. Volume Type May be one of the following: • Active: Volume for which no Replays have been taken. See Also View Server Charts on page 109 140 Storage Center 6. The results are shown for the most current 1 hour period.Chapter 5 Servers Server Charts Tab The server Charts tab displays Read and Write performance for the sever.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 164 About VLAN Tagging . . 146 Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents Setting Controller Properties . . and SAS interconnects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Rebalancing Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Managing IO Card Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-controllers provide automatic failover. . . . . . . 166 Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection . . . . . . . . .or dualcontrollers with Fibre Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Dell Compellent 141 . . . . . . iSCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP . . . . . . . . .6 Controllers The Dell Compellent controller provides central processing for the Storage Center and also manages RAID storage. . 185 User Interface Reference for Controllers . . . . . . . Storage Center can be configured with either single. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 About Jumbo Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 About Controller Virtual Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Viewing SAS Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Viewing Controller Status . 5 If you are using IPv6 addresses. 2 From the shortcut menu.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select a controller. Caution: Do not change any IPv4 properties in the Controller Properties dialog box without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. 142 Storage Center 6. select Properties. select Properties.Chapter 6 Controllers Setting Controller Properties The Controller Properties dialog box displays information about a controller. 6 Click OK to confirm any changes. 2 From the shortcut menu. Changing IP properties can result in the loss of data. 4 Change the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface IP as needed. 3 Click the IP tab. and you must do so if you are using IPv6. Add Controller Notes The Controller Properties Info tab provide general controller information. select a controller. 1 In the System Tree. 3 Enter the controller name in the box. You may change the Management IP (Ether 0). 4 Click OK to confirm any changes. 4 (Optional) Add notes. 2 From the shortcut menu. Change the Controller Name Use the Controller Properties General tab to change the controller name. make sure to enter the IPv6 Prefix Length. Controller properties information appears with the General tab selected. select a controller. Set Controller IP Properties The Controller IP addresses for internal communications are established during system setup and rarely need to be changed. select Properties. Controller properties information appears. Controller properties information appears. 3 Click the Info tab to view information about controller creation and updates. 1 In the System Tree. 1 In the System Tree. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum voltage. • Temps Displays temperature sensor properties including position of the sensor. select a component to display information about the component. and status. displays fan status and current rpm. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. Cache card information may be required by Dell Technical Support Services. • Fans For each of the blowers in the fan module. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum temp. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum rpms. and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures. if it is present.Viewing Controller Status Viewing Controller Status From the Controllers node on the System Tree you can view controller hardware status. The voltage gauge displays voltage zones. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. cache size. and upper and lower critical and warning rpms. If it is not operating in green zone. • Power Supplies Displays the power supply name. 1 In the System Tree. 2 From the list. • Voltage Displays voltage properties including position of the sensor. status. status. The rpm gauge displays fan zones. in service date. expand a Controller node. and current temp. and upper and lower critical and warning voltage. Dell Compellent 143 . adjust the ambient temperature. if there is a failure. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. firmware version. • Cache Card Displays information about the card including the cache card model. and if the AC is lost. and current voltage. System Manager displays a list of controllers in the Storage Center with basic information about each one. select Controllers. System Manager displays information for the individual controller. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 144 Storage Center 6. 2 Click on a specific controller. System Manager displays a list of controllers.Chapter 6 Controllers View Controller Information When you select the Controller node in the System Tree. click the CPU Performance tab. • Right-click an object to display additional options. 2 Click on a specific controller. View the Back of a Controller System Manager can display the back view of the controller. 3 In the main window. 1 In the System Tree. showing HBA. expand the Controllers node. 2 Click on a specific controller. System Manager displays CPU performance and memory usage as a percentage of total capability used. Note: IO port location varies by controller type. and power supply locations. 4 View more information and options using these methods: • Hover the cursor over an object to view more information. Dell Compellent 145 . click the Back tab. port. expand the Controllers node. 1 In the System Tree. 3 In the main window.Viewing Controller Status View Controller Performance Information System Manager displays CPU and memory statistics for the most current one-hour period. 146 Storage Center 6. In a dual-controller configuration. and hardware are given. redundancy is best achieved by creating one fault domain for each transport type. In a virtual environment all ports are primary and can read and write IO. expand the Controllers node. 3 Expand the nodes for IO Cards→ Card Type→ Specific Card. 1 In the System Tree. 2 Expand the node for a specific controller. the physical identity. Note: Although you can have more than one fault domain for each transport type (such as iSCSI or FC). This eliminates the need to reserve ports in case of a failure.Chapter 6 Controllers About Controller Virtual Ports Virtual ports change IO ports from a physical to a virtualized representation. • FC and iSCSI: System Manager displays a virtual port for each physical port. any port within the fault domain takes over for the failed port. • iSCSI only: System Manager creates a control port for each iSCSI fault domain (usually there is only one). 4 Select a specific port. even though it controls all the iSCSI cards within that domain. For virtual ports. the current and preferred physical port are shown. speed. If a port fails. After enabled. For physical ports.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . virtual ports are displayed in the System Tree under the IO card to which they belong. the control port appears on only one controller. 1 In the System Tree. View FC Card Information When you select the FC node in the System Tree. When you select a specific IO card. World Wide Name (WWN) Unique identifier for the item. Status Status of port — may be Up. location. Dell Compellent Field Description Name Name of IO card. System Manager displays a list of FC cards in the controller. expand a Controller node. 3 Select a specific FC card. 2 Click on FC. Down. Use these tasks to view information about Fibre Channel cards and ports. and status.Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type. Description IO card vendor information. Type IO card type — may be FC or iSCSI. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card. System Manager displays details about the selected card. or Reserved. 147 . The window displays status and other information about each Fibre Channel IO Card installed in the controller. NPIV must be enabled on the attached switch. For back-end ports.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . If it is a back-end port.Chapter 6 Controllers 148 Field Description Speed IO transport speed. Storage Center 6. Purpose Network connection — Front End. When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode. shows fault domain. Both Count Total of front-end devices and back-end disk drives. choose a preferred controller. indicates if it is in use. Target Count Number of active disk drives in the Storage Center. Map Count Number of mapped volumes. Preferred Controller Legacy ports only: When ports are rebalanced. NPIV Mode Indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual ports. or Unknown. Back End. this is blank. Fault Domain For front-end ports. Initiator Count Number of front-end connections. Usage Legacy ports only: For front-end ports. shows whether it is a primary or reserved port. and other information in the General tab of the main window. 3 Expand a specific FC card. Dell Compellent 149 . expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. domains. 2 Click on FC.Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports View FC IO Port General Information System Manager displays port names. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Select a specific port on the FC card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO port. slot and port locations. or 5 Minutes. The Connectivity view is the same for FC cards with or without virtual ports enabled. 4 Select the Connectivity tab. Set the Update Frequency for FC Card Status Use the options below the tabs to change how and when System Manager updates the view. 4 Choose one of the following: Off. and node names. 2 Expand the FC node.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 30 Seconds. 2 Click the Connectivity tab. expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. select an FC card. 3 Click Set Update Frequency. 1 In the System Tree. 1 Minute. 150 Storage Center 6.Chapter 6 Controllers View FC IO Card Connectivity System Manager displays IO Card and port information such as WWN. 5 Seconds. 3 Select a specific FC card. 1 In the System Tree. The window displays FC IO card connectivity information. 3 Select a specific FC card. 1 In the System Tree. The FC IO card hardware status information appears. from which you can view IO Card properties. Dell Compellent • The port location is identified.Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports View FC IO Card Hardware Information Use the Hardware tab to view the card location within the controller. 4 Click the Hardware tab. 2 Expand the FC node. expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 151 . • Right-clicking over the card displays the shortcut menu. • Mousing over the card displays the name and type. Chapter 6 Controllers View FC IO Card Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. 1 In the System Tree, expand a Controller node and IO Cards node. 2 Expand the FC node. 3 Select a specific FC card. 4 Click Charts. The FC IO Card charts appears. For each FC IO card, System Manager displays: 152 • KBs per second for Reads and Writes and Total KBs per second • IO rate per second for Reads and Writes and Total IO per second Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Viewing Fibre Channel Card and Ports Set FC IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box appears: 3 Enter a user alias (port name). 4 Click OK. The new name appears in the System Tree. Reset IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click Reset User Alias. 4 Click OK. Set NPIV Mode Use the Properties dialog box to change the NPIV mode. 1 In the System Tree, select an FC card. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 Click the Use NPIV Mode checkbox. This checkbox indicates whether NPIV Mode is turned on to allow FC virtual ports. When converting an FC port to Virtual Mode, NPIV must be enabled on the attached switch. 4 Click OK. Dell Compellent 153 Chapter 6 Controllers Change Preferred Physical Port Use the Properties dialog box to change the preferred physical port for the FC virtual port. 1 In the System Tree select a FC virtual port. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Properties. 3 In the Properties dialog box, select the Preferred Physical Port from the drop-down menu. 4 Click OK. 154 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type, location, and status. Use these tasks to view information about iSCSI cards and ports. View iSCSI Card Information When you select the iSCSI node in the System Tree, System Manager displays a list of iSCSI cards in the controller. When you select a specific IO card, System Manager displays details about the selected card. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 2 Click on iSCSI. The window displays status and other information about all iSCSI IO Cards installed in the controller. For virtual ports, a control port was created during virtual port setup for each iSCSI fault domain. The control port resides in the System Tree within the iSCSI folder. In a dualcontroller configuration, the control port can reside within the iSCSI folder of either controller. All iSCSI ports on both controllers in the same fault domain use the same control port. Traffic is redirected to the appropriate virtual port. Dell Compellent 155 Chapter 6 Controllers 3 In the System Tree, select a specific iSCSI card. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card. For virtual ports, Hardware-related tab options are omitted, since the port is not reliant on a specific IO card. Legacy Mode View Virtual Port Mode View Physical Port 156 Virtual Port Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports View iSCSI Control Port Information System Manager communicates to iSCSI ports through the control port address, and all traffic is redirected from the control port to the appropriate virtual port. 1 In the System Tree, expand Controllers and IO Cards. 1 Click on iSCSI. 2 Select a specific iSCSI card. 3 Select a control port. • You cannot change information in this view, but you can select and copy it into other windows. • The port number is the TCP port number. The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but it can be changed if there is a special requirement to use different TCP port number. See Also Change the iSCSI Card Port Number on page 162 About VLAN Tagging on page 164 Dell Compellent 157 Chapter 6 Controllers View Advanced iSCSI Card Information Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have remote connections set up using Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). For information about CHAP, see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174. 1 In the System Tree, select an iSCSI card. System Manager displays general iSCSI card information. 2 Click the Advanced tab. The iSCSI advanced card information appears. 158 Field Description Port Number TCP port number. Enable Data Digest An iSCSI data digest enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI data Protocol Data Units (PDUs) — may be Yes or No. Enable Header Digest Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No. Enable Immediate Write Data Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No. Window Size Size of window may be from 32 to 2048 KB. Keep Alive Timeout May be from 5 seconds to 18 hours. SCSI Command Data Timeout May be from 5 second to 18 hours. Default Time to Wait May be from 1 second to 10 minutes. Default Time to Retain May be from 1 second to 10 minutes. CHAP Authentication Shows if enabled — may be Yes or No. CHAP Name CHAP name if enabled. CHAP Secret CHAP secret if enabled. Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Note: Information and tabs displayed vary depending on whether you have remote connections set up using CHAP. • Mousing over the port displays port name and type. select an iSCSI card. View iSCSI Hardware Information Use the Hardware tab to display specific card information and shows the card location within the controller. if any. 2 Click the Connectivity tab. 2 Click the Hardware tab. select an iSCSI card. Dell Compellent • The port location is highlighted. port and IP address. 1 In the System Tree. • Right-click to open the shortcut menu. 159 . System Manager displays iSCSI card connectivity. see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174. 1 In the System Tree. from which you can view Properties and status.Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports View iSCSI IO Card Connectivity Use the Connectivity tab to display IO card and port information such as WWN. For information about CHAP. performance charts include a drop-down menu from which to select a port to view. select an iSCSI card. If virtual ports are enabled.Chapter 6 Controllers View iSCSI Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to see read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. 2 Click the Charts tab. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Legacy Mode View Virtual Port Mode View 160 Storage Center 6. Dell Compellent 161 . Change the iSCSI Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to change the User Alias name. The dialog box opens with the General tab selected. select Edit Fault Domain. 2 From the shortcut menu. 3 Edit or change the fault domain. select Edit Fault Domain. 4 Change the IP Address. The new name appears in the System Tree.Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports Change an iSCSI Control Port Fault Domain 1 In the System Tree. 2 From the shortcut menu. select an iSCSI control port. Net Mask. select Properties. select an iSCSI control port. 4 Click OK. or Gateway. select an iSCSI card. 1 In the System Tree. 2 From the shortcut menu. 3 Select the IP Settings tab. 3 Enter a user alias (port name). Change iSCSI Control Port IP Settings 1 In the System Tree. 1 In the System Tree. Change the IP Address Use the Properties dialog box to change the iSCSI card IP address. and Gateway IP Address for the card. Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change the iSCSI port number. 4 Enter the new TCP Port Number. Subnet Mask. select Properties. Change the iSCSI Card Port Number The default iSCSI port number is 3260 but you can change it if there is a special requirement to use a different TCP port number. 3 Click Reset User Alias. 1 In the System Tree.Chapter 6 Controllers Reset IO Card User Alias Use the Properties dialog box to reset the User Alias name. 162 Storage Center 6. select an iSCSI card. 4 Click OK. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 5 Click OK. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. select an iSCSI card. 4 Click OK. select Properties. select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 3 Enter the IP Address. select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu. • Default Time to Retain: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes. 5 Click OK.Viewing iSCSI Cards and Ports Change Digest Settings Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI digest settings. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Set the timeout values as needed: Dell Compellent • Keep Alive Data Timeout: Duration between two keep-alive data transmissions in idle condition. • SCSI Command Data Timeout: Timeout period after which the SCSI controller. select an iSCSI card. Default is off. • Enable Header Digest: Check to enable header processing. upon detecting that a command has not received a response. select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu. select an iSCSI card. An iSCSI data digest enables a digest (32 bit CRC) on all iSCSI data Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The window size must be divisible by 16 Kb. 2 From the shortcut menu. May be between 5 seconds and 18 hours. select Properties. May be between 5 seconds and 18 hours. 4 Check or clear the options as needed: • Enable Data Digest: Check to enable data digest processing. Default is off. 1 In the System Tree. • Enable Immediate Data Write: Check to enable data to be included as part of the write command PDU. select Properties. 5 Click OK. Default is off. 3 Click the Advanced tab. Change Timeout Duration Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change timeout values. • Default Time to Wait: May be from 1 second to 10 minutes. 3 Click the Advanced tab. will timeout. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. select Properties. 3 Click the Advanced tab. 4 Enter a window size between 16 Kb and 32 Mb. Change Window Size Use the Advanced tab of Properties dialog box to change iSCSI data window size. 163 . Enabling Jumbo Frames Use the General tab of Properties dialog box to change the Frame size. as networks can be logically instead of physically separated. Jumbo frames are recommended only for LAN environments. which in turn reduces network traffic and increases network security (both of which are hampered in cases of single large broadcast domains). Larger payloads create more efficient throughput and require fewer packets to be sent. • Increase control over multiple traffic types. System Manager does not know or need to know how VLAN membership is configured on a switch. while reducing server CPU utilization by two percent to three percent. • Reduce hardware requirement. is increased by enabling larger payloads in each packet. 3 Set the Maximum Transmission Unit to 9000. Storage Center 6. VLANs: 164 • Increase the number of broadcast domains but reduce the size of each broadcast domain. Throughput for large file transfers. such as large multimedia or data files. VLAN can be enabled or disabled on an iSCSI port. Enabling jumbo frames in the Storage Center controller can enhance network throughput and reduce use of the CPU. A jumbo frame is 9000 bytes compared to normal size of 1500 bytes. IO card properties information appears.Chapter 6 Controllers About Jumbo Frames Note: Not all cards support jumbo frames. 2 From the shortcut menu. The Storage Center iSCSI I/O port is an end station to the VLAN. 1 In the System Tree. See Also Jumbo Frames and Flow Control on page 346 About VLAN Tagging Note: Not all cards support VLAN tagging. A VLAN consists of a network of computers that behave as if connected to the same wire — even though they may be physically connected to different segments of a LAN. Environments with iSCSI servers running software initiators using standard or smarter NICs receive the biggest benefit from jumbo frames. Enabling jumbo frames can speed up iSCSI performance by about 5 percent. see Other iSCSI Settings on page 347. The default is disabled.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select an iSCSI card. For VLAN setting recommendations. A virtual local area network (VLAN) is configured on the system switch. select Properties. 4 Click OK. Because TOE (TCP off-load engine) cards and HBAs already do off-loading. CPU savings from jumbo frames is minimal. • Reduce management effort to create subnetworks. 3 Select Enable VLAN Tagging. In the event of congestion. select Properties. When a VID is configured. 2 From the shortcut menu. the frame is discarded. this gives a priority to the VLAN. all outbound Ethernet frames are tagged. all inbound Ethernet frames must be tagged and the VID must match the configured VID for that interface. from 1 to 4095. Zero is the lowest priority and seven is the highest. When VLAN tagging is disabled. Enable VLAN Tagging 1 In the System Tree. 5 Enter a user priority number. Discarding frames is called VLAN filtering. When VLAN tagging is enabled. When VLAN tagging is enabled. The IO Card Properties dialog box appears. If the card is plugged into a switch that has been configured with a VLAN. select an iSCSI card. 6 Click OK. Dell Compellent 165 . otherwise Ethernet frame is discarded.About VLAN Tagging Each Storage Center iSCSI I/O card can be configured with VLAN identifier (VID). If the inbound Ethernet frame does not match the configured VID. all outbound Ethernet frames are untagged. 4 Enter a VLAN ID (VID) to match the configured VID on the switch. When VLAN tagging is not enabled. the switch inserts the VID into the untagged Ethernet frame. the inbound Ethernet frame must be untagged. Storage Center becomes an end station in the VLAN. location. View SAS IO Card Information When you select the SAS node in the System Tree.Chapter 6 Controllers Viewing SAS Cards System Manager provides IO card and port information such as type. Use these tasks to view information about SAS cards and ports. 3 Select a specific SAS card. System Manager displays a list of SAS cards in the controller. 166 Storage Center 6. The window displays status and other information about SAS IO cards installed in the controller. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . System Manager displays details about the selected card. When you select a specific IO card. and status. The window displays detailed information about the selected IO card. 2 Click on SAS. expand Controllers and IO Cards. Role. 1 In the System Tree. and Port ID. Dell Compellent 167 . Status. 2 Click on SAS. 3 Click the Connectivity tab. expand Controllers and IO Cards.Viewing SAS Cards View SAS IO Card Connectivity Status Use the Connectivity tab to display SAS card and port information such as WWN. SAS IO card connectivity information appears. and SAS nodes. 4 Select the General tab. 3 Select a specific SAS port. 168 Storage Center 6. 2 Select a specific SAS card. 1 In the System Tree. expand Controllers. IO Cards.Chapter 6 Controllers View SAS Port Properties Select a port to view the port properties in the General tab.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The port location is highlighted. Device Name Name of device. Slot Number of slot from left (6) to right (1). The SAS chart appears. 2 Select the Chart tab. IO Cards. expand Controllers. SFPs allow network operators to connect different interface types to the same network equipment using an SFP port. View SAS IO Card Performance Charts Use the Charts tab to read and write speeds and IO rates for the card. Revision Revision of the hardware. Dell Compellent 169 . 1 In the System Tree. SFP Data Data sent by Small Form-factor Pluggables (SFPs). such as PCI-E. and SAS nodes. Slot Type Name of slot. from which you can view Properties and status. select a SAS port. Slot Port Number of slot port from top (1) to bottom (4). 4 Select the Hardware tab. 2 Select a specific SAS card.Viewing SAS Cards View SAS Port Location Use the Hardware tab to view port locations on the controller. Firmware Version Version of the hardware firmware. Field Description Description Description of the port. • Right-click to open the shortcut menu. • Mouse over the port to display port name and type. 1 In the System Tree. 3 Select a specific SAS port. such as PCIDEV. 170 • If the local Storage Center has CHAP enabled. Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports Use the Storage Management menu to add a remote Storage Center to a local Storage Center. Connecting the remote Storage Center to the cards in one controller connects the remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers. • Remote iSCSI Connections: iSCSI facilitates data transfers over IP networks. you can replicate volumes. select. Storage Center 6. Unlike FC. System→Setup→ Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections menu or you can use the shortcut menu as described in the following steps. it does not matter which of the two folders you select. A Remote Storage Center connects an iSCSI port on one Storage Center to an iSCSI port on another Storage Center.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 From the shortcut menu. which requires special-purpose cabling. • Remote Fibre Channel Connections: Storage Center automatically detects a Storage Center system connected through Fibre Channel (FC). see Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP on page 174. the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections page appears asking if NAT is configured. All replications are managed using Enterprise Manager. select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. After being recognized. • If the local Storage Center is not using CHAP. 1 Select an iSCSI folder. the configure CHAP wizard starts. If you are using CHAP. remote FC systems appear in the System Tree. In a dual-controller configuration. From the Storage Management menu.Chapter 6 Controllers Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection After a local (source) Storage Center is connected to a remote (target) Storage Center and the remote Storage Center is connected back to the local Storage Center. iSCSI can be run over long distances using an existing IP network infrastructure. The next page appears. go to Step 4. b Enter the NAT IP addresses and iSCSI names for the remote Compellent iSCSI cards. 5 Add the remote addresses: • If the remote Storage Center is using iSCSI virtual ports. Dell Compellent 171 . • If NAT is not enabled. or greater. The link speed page appears. click No NAT. Gigabit. The Advanced Options page appears. Continue with Step Step 7. 6 Click Continue. so if either the local or remote Storage Center is using virtual ports. The link speed page appears. add the IP addresses of the control port. add the IP addresses of each IO card. 7 Enter the speed of the network link between this Storage Center and the remote Storage Center: T1. 4 If NAT is not enabled.Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection Note: NAT is not available in configurations using virtual ports. c Click Continue. 8 Click Continue or Advanced. • If NAT is enabled. NAT is not enabled. go to Step 3. 3 If NAT is enabled: a Click Yes NAT. T3/100 MB. • If the remote Storage Center is not using iSCSI virtual ports. b Repeat the steps described in Add a Remote Storage Center to iSCSI Ports on page 170. The local Storage Center now recognizes the remote system. select an iSCSI card.Chapter 6 Controllers 9 Keep or change any of the following: • Port number • Enable or disable data digest • Enable or disable header digest • Enable or disable immediate data • Select a window size. 12 To identify the local Storage Center to the remote Storage Center: a Log into the remote Storage Center. The exact information displayed depends on whether Storage Center uses Virtual Port mode or Legacy Port mode. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. 172 Storage Center 6. But before the Remote System configuration is complete. Remote Compellent iSCSI Connections information appears. Click Continue again. 1 In the System Tree. The Add Remote System confirmation page appears.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . View Remote iSCSI Connections Follow these tasks to view remote iSCSI connection information in System Manager. from 3 seconds to 18 hours • Select a SCSI command data time-out. from 16KB to 2048 KB • Select a keep alive time-out. If the Link Speed page reappears. from 3 seconds to 18 hours 10 Click Continue. 11 Click Add Now. you must log into the remote Storage Center and identify the local Storage Center. 6 Click OK. • Enable or disable header digest. from 3 minutes to 18 hours. from 16KB to 2048 KB. • Enable or disable data digest. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Click Yes. Dell Compellent 173 . Connection is deleted. The Delete iSCSI Remote Connection page appears. 1 In the System Tree. select an iSCSI card. 3 From the shortcut menu. from 3 seconds to 18 hours. 4 Select delete from all IO cards or just the selected IO card. 4 Click Advanced. • Select a window size. • Select a SCSI command data time-out. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. select Delete. 5 Change any of the following: • Port number.Creating a Remote Storage Center Connection Change Advanced Remote Connection Properties Follow these tasks to configure remote connection properties. 3 From the shortcut menu. The Advanced Remote Compellent Connection Properties page appears. • Select a keep alive time-out. select Properties. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. • Enable or disable immediate data. Delete iSCSI Remote Connections Follow these tasks to remove iSCSI remote connections in the Storage Center. select an iSCSI card. This tab displays information about existing CHAP initiators. 174 Storage Center 6. subsequent steps depend on whether Storage Center(s) are using Legacy Port Mode or Virtual Port Mode. select Properties. • Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port Mode) on page 178 • Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode) on page 179 Note: Bi-directional (mutual) CHAP is supported only in Legacy Port mode. • Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode) on page 178. select the iSCSI node.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . After enabling CHAP on each Storage Center. select an iSCSI card. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu.Chapter 6 Controllers Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an iSCSI security option that provides connection authentication based on secrets (essentially passwords) that are exchanged when a connection is established. Property information appears displaying the Remote CHAP Initiator tab. select the iSCSI control port. Enable CHAP Follow these tasks to enable CHAP in the Storage Center. 4 Click Add Now. • In Virtual Port Mode. 1 In the System Tree. The remote CHAP initiator is added. 3 Enter the CHAP Name and CHAP Secret of the remote CHAP initiator to be added to the control port or IO card. Add a Remote CHAP Initiator Follow these tasks to add a remote CHAP initiator to Storage Center. select a port. Display Remote CHAP Initiators Before configuring new CHAP initiators. CHAP is enabled in the Properties of the control port. Note: Server CHAP Secret is required only if using bi-directional authentication. Bi-directional authentication is only supported in Legacy Port mode. you can view existing remote CHAP initiators. 1 In the System Tree. CHAP is enabled in the Properties of each iSCSI IO port. The only difference between adding a remote CHAP initiator and a remote Storage Center CHAP initiator is that Storage Center enters the first part of the Compellent IQN name in the remote Compellent initiator page. 1 In the System Tree. • In Virtual Port Mode. select a control port or an iSCSI IO port. select Add Remote CHAP Initiators. select Properties. • In Legacy Port Mode. Steps may include some or all of the following: • Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) on page 176. It is not supported between Storage Centers using virtual ports. • In Legacy Port Mode. IO card property information appears. System Manager warns you that saving these changes will disrupt iSCSI traffic. 5 For bi-directional authentication. Storage Center requires a CHAP Secret.Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP 3 Click the CHAP tab. The IO Card Properties dialog box appears. If you leave CHAP Secret blank when configuring a QLA4010 card. 7 Click Save Changes to save your changes. System Manager asks you to enter a CHAP Secret. • In Legacy Port Mode. • In Virtual Port Mode. click Cancel to abandon your changes. CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected physical port. CHAP Name is the IQN name of the selected control port. enter a 12-character alphanumeric secret (similar to a password) in the CHAP Secret field. 4 Check CHAP Authentication. Or. For local (non-remote) Compellent connections. The CHAP Secret field is no longer grayed out. Note: If you are using a QLogic QLA4010. you cannot change this name. 6 Click OK. which is an iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN). Dell Compellent 175 . System Manager supplies the CHAP Name. 2 In the System Tree. select an iSCSI node.Chapter 6 Controllers Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Legacy Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder. select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. 3 From the shortcut menu. 176 Storage Center 6. it does not matter which of the two iSCSI folders you select. Note: In a dual-controller configuration. If you select an individual card (in Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 1 Log on to the Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP. The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections to IO Card wizard starts. the connection or initiator is added for all ports. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 8 Click Continue. The CHAP verification page appears. You can copy an iSCSI name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. 11 Click Add Now. 9 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu. Note: IP addresses are displayed in the iSCSI folder of the remote Storage Center. 12 Repeat steps 1 through 11 for all remote Compellent Connections. 10 Click Continue. Dell Compellent 177 . 6 Enter the CHAP Name and specify a Target Secret for the remote Compellent iSCSI port. 5 Click Continue. It is the primary secret used in the connection initiation process. 7 Check or clear the check box to enable or disable Bi-directional Authentication.Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP 4 Enter the IP Address and iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. Note: The Remote Target Secret must be at least 12 alphanumeric characters. The next page of the wizard is displayed. Note: You can find the Remote Port Secret on the Advanced tab of the local iSCSI port in the CHAP Secret field. 3 Enter the IP Address of the remote Compellent domain control port. the connection or initiator is added for all ports. the connection or initiator is added for all ports. Add CHAP-Enabled Remote Compellent Connections (Virtual Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder. 5 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port. enter the Remote Port Secret. 10 Click Add Now. 1 In the System Tree. select Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections. If you select a control port (in Virtual Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. select the iSCSI folder. The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts. 2 From the shortcut menu. 178 Storage Center 6. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Enter the Remote Target Secret of the remote Compellent connection to be added to the IO card. 9 Click Continue. Note: Bi-directional CHAP is not supported between remote Storage Centers using virtual ports. you can copy the CHAP name from the remote Compellent port.Chapter 6 Controllers Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Legacy Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder. 3 Enter the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent connection. 7 Click Continue. 6 Click Add Now. 8 Select a link speed from the drop-down menu. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remote Compellent connection you are adding. Note: To complete the CHAP Name. The Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators wizard starts. 6 Enter a Target Secret. If you select an individual card (in Legacy Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 5 (Conditional) If using bi-directional CHAP. select Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Note: The Remote Target Secret defined in the remote Compellent CHAP initiator must match the Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP enabled Compellent connection to the local Storage Center. 4 Click Continue. The remote CHAP Initiator is added. select the iSCSI card node. 4 Enter the iSCSI Name of the remote Compellent physical port. Dell Compellent 179 .Configuring Remote Connections Using CHAP Add Remote Compellent CHAP Initiators (Virtual Port Mode) If you add an iSCSI remote connection or remote Compellent CHAP initiator from an iSCSI folder. it does not matter which of the two iSCSI folders you select. 6 Enter the Target Secret in the Server CHAP Secret field. Note: Adding remote CHAP initiators for each remote physical port in the domain is required for retain remote connections during controller failover. the connection or initiator is added for all ports. You can easily copy the CHAP Name from the remote Compellent domain control port. Connecting the remote Storage Center to cards in one controller connects remote Storage Center to all cards on both controllers. select Add Remote CHAP Initiators. select an iSCSI folder. 1 Log on to a Storage Center on which you enabled CHAP. 5 Add the CHAP Name of the remote Compellent domain control port. 3 From the shortcut menu. If you select a control port (in Virtual Port mode) the connection or initiator is added only for that port. 2 In the System Tree. You can copy the iSCSI Name from the iSCSI Name field of the remote Compellent iSCSI port. Note: In a dual-controller configuration. 2 From the shortcut menu. select Properties. 7 Click Add Now.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 Click Properties. Delete Remote CHAP Initiators from a Server Follow these tasks to remove CHAP initiators from the server. 4 Uncheck CHAP Authentication. 3 Click Delete. select a control port or iSCSI card. 5 Click OK. 1 In the System Tree. 2 From the shortcut menu. 3 Click the CHAP tab. System Manager asks you to confirm. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Click Yes. If you select mutual authentication. select Remote CHAP Initiators. If it is enabled. Note: If you disable CHAP. select an iSCSI card. 6 Select or clear Perform Mutual Authentication. 2 Click the Remote Compellent Connections tab. The CHAP initiator is deleted. 4 Click CHAP. 1 In the System Tree. select an iSCSI card. enter the connection secret and the remote connection secret.Chapter 6 Controllers Note: The Target Secret defined for the remote CHAP initiator must match the Target Secret used when adding the remote CHAP enabled Compellent connection to the local Storage Center. Change CHAP Authentication Settings Follow these tasks to modify CHAP authentication requirements in the Storage Center. 180 Storage Center 6. 8 Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each remote Compellent physical port connection in the iSCSI domain. enter the remote IO card secret. 5 Select or clear CHAP Authentication Enabled. Disable CHAP Follow these tasks to disable CHAP in the Storage Center. you must re-do all remote Compellent connections. • Connect the back-end to a port that is undefined on the new hardware configuration. The wizard is typically used when upgrading IO cards or controllers. The wizard is used to configure IO card hardware changes on a per-port basis after physical IO card changes have been made.Managing IO Card Changes Managing IO Card Changes The Configure IO Card Changes wizard simplifies the task of moving. Storage Center is able to detect iSCSI targets and acquire the boot configuration from the drives even though the slot/port is marked as undefined. upgrading. replacing. the Storage Center searches back-end targets for the configuration. you can specify: • If an IO card should be linked to an existing configuration • If the IO card is new hardware • If the configuration for a removed IO card should be deleted The wizard guides you through the following actions: • Associating IO cards with existing port configurations • Indicating which IO cards are new hardware • Deleting configurations for IO cards that have been removed Before using the wizard. For each local port. you should be aware of the following: • Changes should be performed by a certified installer or with the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services. • At least one back-end port must remain in its original location. • Do not rebalance any ports until controller(s) have been replaced and all hardware configuration changes are complete. When the appropriate back-end slot/port is identified. back-end access must be maintained during the controller replacement procedure. or re-purposing IO cards in Storage Center controllers. • A controller restart is required to implement changes. This can be done in two ways: • Keep at least one common back-end slot/port defined and connected in the same manner on the new hardware configuration as it was on the old hardware configuration. Plan a Hardware Change Upon boot. Because a controller cannot boot without configuration information. record this information on the Port Usage Work Sheet and continue the upgrade process. See Also Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184 Dell Compellent 181 . or removed hardware. move. 4 Replace. System Manager automatically launches the wizard if hardware changes are detected. • Right click on a controller and select Configure IO Card Changes. Note: Replacing cards with different connection types (for example. This reduces down time by facilitating recabling. Refer to upgrade documentation for the specific change for more detailed instructions. Columns and information displayed on the next page of the wizard may differ depending upon the transport type selected and whether the IO card represents existing. In a dual-controller Storage Center. The slot/port will be placed in an up state (Status = Up) when the new configuration is saved and the controller is restarted. 2 When the wizard starts. See Also Port Usage Work Sheet on page 184 Configure IO Card Changes Use the IO Card Change wizard to match previous port configurations with new ports. 1 Power down and unplug the controller. 5 Plug in and power on the controller.Chapter 6 Controllers Change the Hardware Changing hardware follows these general tasks. the second controller takes on all functions of the Storage Center. 182 Storage Center 6. FC with SAS) may result in the previously occupied slot/port being placed in a down state (Status = Down). note any warnings and click Continue to proceed. 1 Access the Configure IO Card Changes wizard in one of two ways: • Upon log on or browser refresh. preventing a system outage. or remove the IO card(s) and reconnect as recorded on the Port Usage Work Sheet. new. 2 Record/tag the cabling for the affected card.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 Disconnect the cables on the IO card. Managing IO Card Changes Local ports are displayed separated by transport type (FC. this indicates that the System Manager is unable to automatically link to an existing port configuration. For ports with an existing IO card. • New IO Card. Select the appropriate tab to configure the IO card changes for the ports of each transport type. Dell Compellent 183 . click Restore Defaults. 1 Use the drop-down menu in the Link to Configuration for Physical Port column to assign new link configurations. You are asked if you want to reset the controller. 2 Click Assign Now. – Indicates that System Manager has detected that the IO card for the port has been removed and the existing configuration for the port should be deleted. Examine each Link to determine if they are appropriate. Assign a New Link Configuration System Manager may match a port to an existing configuration that appears to fit. confirm that the IO card has actually been removed from the Storage Center and that you want to delete the configuration for the port. the default is to use the existing configuration for the port. • If applicable. Resetting port configuration to the default selection overrides any existing port selections. A controller restart is required for new port roles to be assigned. 3 Click Yes when asked if you want to restart the controller. If there are no IO card changes detected for the slot/port. new or removed hardware. Resetting port configuration to the default selection will override any existing port selections. • Not Set – A placeholder that indicates a selection needs to be made for the port. Values for each port vary by transport type and whether the IO card has been removed. Delete existing port configuration. – Indicates the port will be configured as new hardware. Restore a Default Port Selection Select the Restore Defaults button to restore the default port selection for the selected transport. Before selecting this option. The pane identifies IO cards that have changed by: • Displaying Yes in the Changed column. Do not use any existing port configurations. iSCSI. • For ports on IO cards that have not been removed. Any existing configurations for the port are deleted. Note: To restore the default port selection for a selected transport. 4 Repeat the process starting from Change the Hardware on page 182 to update the remaining controller if required. a selection is shown for each existing physical port configuration of the selected transport type. • IO Card has been removed. The columns and information displayed may differ depending upon the transport type selected and whether the IO card is existing. the Previous Description and Previous Device Type fields contain information about the IO card that previously occupied the slot/port. or SAS). 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . print and complete a copy of the following worksheet to record the current configuration and the planned configuration changes. the system will not boot.Chapter 6 Controllers Port Usage Work Sheet For each controller. Caution: One back end port must remain in the same location to enable access to existing configuration information. Without this connection. BE Continuity Slot / Port Slot 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 3 Port 4 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port Slot 2 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port Slot 3 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port Slot 4 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port Slot 5 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port Slot 6 Port 1 Port 2 Port Type (BE/FE) Tagged Target Slot / Port 184 Storage Center 6. 2 From the display. 1 In the System Tree. right-click the Controller icon. 3 From the shortcut menu. If a controller has been added or taken offline. System Manager lists the controllers and displays the local port condition as unbalanced. ports can become unbalanced. in the Rebalance Local Ports dialog box. 4 (Optional) To clear the automatic reminder from System Manager to rebalance local ports.Rebalancing Local Ports Rebalancing Local Ports Storage Center balances data storage between controller ports. Dell Compellent 185 . select Rebalance Local Ports. select or clear Check for unbalanced local ports at startup. Note: Access is restricted while the rebalancing process is in progress. click the Controller icon. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Available Memory Amount of unused memory.Chapter 6 Controllers User Interface Reference for Controllers This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show controller information. Dell Service Tag Number that identifies the controller to Dell Technical Support Services. The controller General tab provides an overview of the selected controller. 186 Field Description Controller Name Name of current controller. Storage Center 6. Controller ID Number that identifies the Storage Center. in this case controller. Controller General Tab Selecting a controller in the System Tree opens the main window with a set of tabs across the top. Version Software version of controller. Model Model number of the controller Total Memory Amount of memory installed in the controller. Type Object type. Dell Asset Tag Number assigned to the controller for tracking or security purposes. Each tab provides information about the controller. Ether0 (MGMT) Interface IP. Last Boot Time Date and time of last reboot. Created By System user name under which the controller was set up. it is a peer. Date Updated Date that the controller software was updated. and Gateway addresses for the ethernet management interface. Primary DNS Server Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server. 187 . Updated By System user name under which the controller was updated. Notes Additional information entered about the controller. Date Created Date that the controller was set up for use in Storage Center.User Interface Reference for Controllers Dell Compellent Field Description Leader Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False). Net Mask. If a controller is not the leader. Status Status of controller — may be Up or Down. Local Port Condition Condition of local port — may be Balanced or Unbalanced. Domain Name Domain name for the controller. Secondary DNS Server (Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS) server. Chapter 6 Controllers Controller CPU PerformanceTab The controller CPU Performance tab shows the CPU and memory usage for the most current one-hour period. • Right-click on an object to view additional options.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Storage Center 6. port. and power supply locations. 188 • Hover the cursor over an object to view more information. Controller Back Tab The controller CPU Back tab shows IO card. it is a peer. Local Port Condition Condition of local port — may be Balanced or Unbalanced. Controller ID Number that identifies the Storage Center. Leader Indicates if a controller is the leader (True) or not the leader (False). Field Description Controller Name Name of current controller. Each tab provides information about the controller. If a controller is not the leader. The controller General tab provides an overview of the selected controller. Status Status of controller — may be Up or Down. Type Object type. Last Boot Time Date and time of last reboot. in this case controller. See Also Change the Controller Name on page 142 Dell Compellent 189 .User Interface Reference for Controllers Controller General Properties Selecting a controller in the System Tree and clicking Properties opens a page with a set of tabs across the top. Net Mask. these fields are blank. Field Description Ether0 (MGMT) Interface IP. 190 Ether1 (IPC) Interface IP. For IPv6. Secondary DNS Server (Optional) Address of the secondary Domain Name System (DNS) server. BMC is the Baseboard Management Controller. you must also enter the IPv6 Prefix Length. addresses are displayed for IP. Net Mask. and Gateway addresses for the ethernet IPC interface. and Gateway addresses for the ethernet MGMT interface. Domain Name Domain name for the controller. Caution: Do not change IP properties in the Controller Properties dialog box without the guidance of a Dell Technical Support Services. and Gateway. • If iDRAC is configured as Static. Storage Center 6. iDRAC (BMC) Interface (Conditional) iDRAC is the Integrated Dell Remote Access Controller. • Configure via: Displays network configuration mode — may be Static or DHCP. If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is configured. Storage Center uses IPv4 for the Management Interface. IPC Interface must use IPv4. Primary DNS Server Address of the primary Domain Name System (DNS) server. however IPv6 may be used.Chapter 6 Controllers Controller IP Properties Use the IP tab to set or change IP addresses.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . This tab is used primarily to set the IP address when using IPv6 for communication with Storage Center. Changing IP properties can result in the loss of data. Net Mask. User Interface Reference for Controllers See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142 Controller Info Properties Use the Info tab to view creation and update information about the controller and to add notes for reference. See Also Add Controller Notes on page 142 Dell Compellent 191 . Chapter 6 Controllers 192 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . 214 Managing Storage Profiles . . . . . . . 203 Managing Disk Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Rebalancing RAID . . . . . 216 Using Manual Storage Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Managing Disks . . . 210 About Storage Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Dell Compellent 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . are available only when specifically included in administrator privileges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Only administrators can perform these tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Managing Storage Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Applying Storage Profiles . . . and work with Storage Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Some commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 User Interface Reference for Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Disks This section describes how to view and manages disks and disk folders. . . . . . . . . . . indicated in the command description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a second storage type is a less efficient use of storage. The ability to change the datapage size and redundancy settings to create a non-standard storage type are available on the Advanced tab of System Management → Volume → Configure My Volume Defaults menu option. • Physically. disks by type. For example. RAID 5-5.2K drives in an SBOD enclosure. You should create a non-standard storage type only when an application program requires a datapage size smaller or larger than the default 2 MB datapage. Spare drives are held in reserve to automatically replace a drive if a managed drive fails. • Non-redundant storage types use RAID 0 in all classes.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • 4 MB: Appropriate for systems that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent Replays. Storage Types Storage type describes a pool of storage (disk folder) with a single datapage size and a specified redundancy level. or RAID 5-9. 15K. Each storage class represents allocated RAID space within a tier of disks in the disk folder. disks are grouped by the enclosure in which they reside as shown in the Enclosures folder. See Also Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210. However. such as a 7.2K. Disks types are grouped without regard to IO speed. or Solid State Disk (SSD). Selecting this size reduces the amount of space System Manager can present to servers. 10K. Storage Center 6. in all tiers.Chapter 7 Disks Disk Management System Manager displays disks both physically and logically. Managed drives are used for data storage. Storage Classes Storage classes exist within each storage type for which a disk folder has been prepared. This selection is appropriate for most applications. or RAID 6-10. or in environments in which Replays are taken frequently under heavy IO. 7. 194 • Single-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10. • Logically. the following additional page sizes are also available: • 512 KB: Appropriate for applications with high performance needs.2K disks in a SAS enclosure is in the same RAID level as 7. RAID 6-6. A disk folder contains both managed and spare drives. RAID levels of storage classes within each tier depend on the redundancy level selected for that tier. For redundant storage types. Note: Because Data Progression (an automatic process that moves infrequently accessed data to slower disks) cannot move data between storage types. The standard storage type is 2 MB redundant. • Dual-redundant tiers can contain storage classes of RAID 10-Dual Mirror. be aware of the following: • After disks are added. When adding disks. Tier 3 is the most cost efficient tier. Dell Compellent 195 . • Create a new disk folder only to address specific application program requirements. Disks of different classifications. select the Assigned disk folder. • The Assigned disk folder was created when the Storage Center was set up. Disk tiers appear. In most configurations. Creating a second disk folder may cause storage to be used less efficiently. 1 In the System Tree. you will need to add enclosures and disks to the Storage Center. • Data cannot be written to unassigned disks. Tier 1 is the highest performance tier. all disks form a single pool of storage in a managed disk folder. The supported maximum number of enclosures attached to a Storage Center depends on the type of enclosure being used. Note: Storage Center automatically migrates less frequently accessed data to lower tiers. the managed disk folder is named Assigned. View Tiers Disks are initially configured when Storage Center is set up.Managing Disks Managing Disks As data begins to consume disk space. Storage Center assigns disks of different classifications to one of three tiers. such as 15K or 10K are all part of the managed disk folder. additional space may not be immediately available. Make sure that you allow enough time for System Manager to allocate space to be used for writes. Managing unassigned disks means moving the disk into a managed (Assigned) disk folder. By default. 196 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Use this screen to configure the redundancy level of each tier of storage within this storage type. select a disk folder. select Configure Storage. 2 From the shortcut menu. Storage tiers are automatically ranked by disk performance. Tier 1 is fastest and Tier 3 the slowest.Chapter 7 Disks Modify Tier Redundancy Modifying tier redundancy requires a RAID rebalance to be completed. 3 Click Modify Tier Redundancy for the tier to change. The Configure Storage wizard starts. and should not be performed unless sufficient free disk space is available within the disk folder. • If there does not appear to be enough disk space available in the disk folder to allow for a RAID Rebalance. select Single Redundant or Dual Redundant. • If System Manager determines that there is sufficient disk space to rebalance data across drives. perform a RAID Rebalance to complete the tier redundancy modification. See Also Managing Disks on page 195 Rebalancing RAID on page 203 Dell Compellent 197 .Managing Disks Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the tier. If a tier does not contain seven disks. 7 Click OK. With the release of Storage Center 6. 4 In the Modify Tier Redundancy dialog box. default redundancy is single redundant for any disk drive size. System Manager asks you to add storage. 6 Repeat for all the tiers to modify.2. If you change from Single Redundant to Dual Redundant. (Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6 with a single spare. users can no longer change tier redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive. a rebalance is started automatically. notice that: • RAID 5-5 Standard becomes RAID 6-6 Standard • RAID 5-5 Fast becomes RAID 6-6 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed) • RAID 5-9 Standard becomes RAID 6-10 Standard • RAID 5-9 Fast becomes RAID 6-10 Fast (if Fast Track is licensed) • RAID 10 Standard becomes RAID 10-DM Standard • RAID 10 Fast becomes RAID 10-DM Fast (if Fast Track is licensed) 5 Click OK to change redundancy or Cancel to stop the operation. 8 If any of the modified tiers contain disks. If there are no unassigned disks. and rebalance RAID. Storage Center scans for new disks. 8 Click Continue. 1 In the Storage Management menu. identify disks to be used as Hot Spares. 6 Click Continue. and disks in the disk folder you are modifying or creating. all disks are selected. 5 By default. any unassigned disks appear in the Unassigned disk folder. but each spare adds to the resiliency of your Storage Center. select Disk →Scan for Disks. hot spares. System Manager asks you to select the folder into which the new disks should be placed. select Manage Unassigned Disks. select the Disks node. Otherwise. The Manage Unassigned Disks wizard starts and displays a list of disks that are unassigned. The wizard displays the disk folder. Click on a check box to deselect a disk. 10 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder. Note: If there is a second disk folder. Depending on your configuration. 3 To manage unassigned disks.Chapter 7 Disks Manage Unassigned Disks The Manage Unassigned Disks wizard takes you through a three-part process in which you select the new disks. Hot spares do not count toward usable storage. System Manager displays a list of the disks you selected and asks you to select disks to be designated as hot spares. and attributes for each disk. Storage Center automatically rebuilds the data that was on the failed disk on to the hot spare disk. 4 From the shortcut menu. If a disk fails. 2 After the scan. the Unassigned disk folder is not displayed. 198 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select one or more disks as spares. 9 (Optional) Click Back to cycle through the previous screens to change hot spares or selected disks. 7 Select the disk(s) to be designated as the hot spare(s). rebalancing can take as long as several days. to fully use all available space. disks must be rebalanced. See Also Managing Storage Types on page 209 Rebalancing RAID on page 203 Rebalancing RAID on page 203 Dell Compellent 199 . However. Depending on your configuration. • Schedule Rebalance: Enables you to defer rebalancing until a later time.Managing Disks • Modify Storage: Allows you to configure a redundancy level (dual or single) for each tier of storage within the disk folder. Be sure to modify storage before you rebalance new disks. • Rebalance Now: Restripes data on to all available disks within a disk folder. Rebalancing runs in the background with low priority. If a rebalance is required. • If you selected multiple disks with and without user data. • If the selected disk does not contain user data. disks without user data will be released immediately and disks with user data will display a warning. For this reason. a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID devices now. The Release Disk wizard starts.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • If the selected disk contains user data. 200 Storage Center 6. 3 After the restripe is complete. That is. click Scan for Disks. the disk is released immediately. or skip balancing. data in the folder is re-striped on the remaining disks. the disk is not released immediately and a warning message is displayed. you should not release disks from a folder unless the remaining disks have enough free space to accommodate re-striping the data. Note: Skipping the rebalance may leave disks in a transitioning state. select Release Disk. if the disk does not appear in the Unassigned folder.Chapter 7 Disks Release a Managed Disk When a managed disk is released from a folder. System Manager may not use the disk(s) until a balance occurs. 2 From the shortcut menu. later. select the disk(s) to release. 1 In the System Tree. Caution: Never release a managed disk without Dell Technical Support Services assistance. 2 From the shortcut menu. select a transitioning disk. The disk immediately reverts to managed and a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rebalance RAID devices now. select Revert to Managed. or skip balancing. later. 3 Click Yes (Revert Now) to revert the disk. 4 Select Skip to exit the wizard.Managing Disks Revert a Released Disk to Managed If a released disk is transitioning to an unmanaged state as indicated by a yellow icon overlay. you can revert the released disk back to being managed. 1 In the System Tree. Dell Compellent 201 . The Revert to Managed wizard starts. 1 In the System Tree. • The disk has been released. This is a single point of failure. a port fails. select the disk(s) to delete. System Manager deletes the disk(s) from the folder and closes the wizard. 3 Click Yes. On the General tab. 3 Select or clear Alert when only one path is available. You can now physically remove the disk(s) from the Storage Center disk enclosure. 202 Storage Center 6. The wizard prompts you to confirm. 1 In the System Tree. its status is reported as Down and health is reported as Unhealthy. Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure Follow these steps to see where a disk is located in the enclosure. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 (Optional) Add notes on the Info tab. select Delete. the controller has only one path to the disk. or a path is cabled incorrectly. select the disk(s) to be included in the alert. disks have two paths to the controller. select a disk. Prerequisites Before deleing a disk make sure that one of the following is true: • The disk has failed and it has no User Allocated Blocks. Steps 1 In the System Tree. select Properties. Alert for Disk with Single Path By default. System Manager switches to physical view and the disk position is highlighted.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 5 Click OK. System Manager displays the Disk Properties information with the General tab selected. 2 From the shortcut menu.Chapter 7 Disks Delete a Disk You can only delete disks that have failed or disks that have been released. Make sure you are alerted if only one path remains to a disk. If one path is disconnected. A failed disk appears with a red dot. select Show Disk in Enclosure. Space Remaining Amount of space remaining to be rebalanced of the initial amount of space requiring a rebalance. The following information is provided when a RAID rebalance is in progress: Dell Compellent Field Description Rebalance Start Time Time at which the Rebalance was started. Operations such as adding or removing disks or modifying redundancy levels can cause data to be unevenly distributed across disks. This information is not available until the rebalance has been running for a sufficient amount of time to create an estimate.Rebalancing RAID Rebalancing RAID Rebalancing RAID restripes data to optimize the use of disk space. or when temporary devices must be created to allow for the replacement of existing devices. The RAID rebalance process redistributes data. RAID rebalancing has the potential to fail or deadlock when moving some RAID devices. Percent Complete Percent of allocated space that has been rebalanced. 203 . If this occurs. RAID rebalancing moves the lowest scoring RAID devices first beginning with the smallest RAID devices. the time required for RAID rebalancing can vary greatly. System Manager distributes data as evenly as possible across disks in a disk folder. RAID rebalancing takes longer when a Storage Center is running low on space. This process also can be used to move data off disks that were moved to another disk folder. it may be necessary to add more disk space to the Storage Center to allow RAID rebalancing to complete. Depending upon the amount of data on your Storage Center. Estimated Completion Time Estimated time at which the rebalance completes. Chapter 7 Disks View Rebalance Status The RAID Rebalance wizard shows rebalance status.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The wizard displays information about the current status of RAID rebalancing. From the Storage Management menu select Disk→ Rebalance RAID. Rebalance Needed One or more classes of storage on the Storage Center reports requiring a rebalance. Rebalance Complete Rebalancing is complete. Storage Center 6. Rebalance Stopped Rebalancing has been stopped prematurely by a user. but one or more classes of storage still reports requiring a rebalance. Rebalance Failed Rebalancing has been performed. The RAID Rebalance wizard starts. The options available vary depending on the rebalance state. In Progress Rebalancing is currently in progress. A RAID rebalance may be in one of the following states: 204 State Description Rebalance Not Needed RAID rebalancing is not currently running and no classes of storage report requiring rebalance. Rebalance Stopping A user has requested that rebalancing be stopped. Final Pass In Progress Rebalancing is completing its final pass. View a RAID Rebalance Schedule The RAID rebalance schedule can be accessed through the View menu. If scheduled. Reopen the wizard to monitor rebalance progress by opening the Storage Management menu and selecting Disk →Rebalance RAID. the RAID Rebalance appears as a scheduled event. This may take several minutes. Schedule Rebalance Allows rebalancing to be scheduled for a later time. From the View menu select Scheduled Events. Dell Compellent 205 . If a rebalance is in progress.Rebalancing RAID RAID Rebalance Options Depending on the current state of RAID rebalance. Option Description Rebalance Now Starts an immediate rebalancing process. the Rebalance RAID wizard may display any of the following options. Stop Rebalance Stops the rebalancing process after the current pass. Close Closes the RAID Rebalance wizard. System Manager continues to rebalance data in the background until complete. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Use the up and down arrows to select the time. 1 From the Storage Management menu select Disk → Rebalance RAID. select Delete. 206 Storage Center 6. depending on the size and activity of your Storage Center.Chapter 7 Disks Schedule a RAID Rebalance Although RAID rebalancing is a background process. 4 Click Save Schedule. Delete a RAID Rebalance Use the View menu to locate the event to delete. 1 From the View menu. System Manager asks you to confirm. The RAID Rebalance wizard starts. 3 Enter the date or use the drop-down menu to view a calendar. The RAID Rebalance appears as a scheduled event. rebalancing can take weeks. 2 Select the Rebalance event. select Scheduled Events. 2 Click Schedule RAID Rebalance. Schedule it accordingly. 4 Click Yes. 3 From the shortcut menu. The following wizard starts. a Storage Center should have only one folder of managed disks. if there are disks of differing sizes. they should be added to the managed disk folder. click Yes. 3 From the list of unmanaged disks. Note: Because Data Progression does not migrate storage across disk folders. By default. 6 Click Continue. If additional disks are added to the Storage Center. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 5 Select the disk to use as a hot spare or accept the default. In most cases. Unassigned disks appear in the Unassigned Disk folder. If a disk folder already exists. a second disk folder impacts the ability of Storage Center to maximize performance. The Create Disk Folder wizard starts.Managing Disk Folders Managing Disk Folders A managed disk folder was created during installation and setup. Only unassigned disks can be added to a disk folder. By default all disks are selected. You cannot create a disk folder without a hot spare. Dell Compellent 207 . and asks you to select one or more disks to be a hot spare. A hot spare replaces a failed disk and is held in reserve until needed. 8 If not using Advanced options. System Manager displays unassigned disks to be added to the new folder. or one of them. there must be at least one hot spare  for each enclosure. go to Step 11. The hot spare disk must be as large or larger than the largest disk of its type in the disk folder. Only in rare circumstances do the benefits of multiple disk folders outweigh the disadvantages. System Manager displays the disks you selected. Storage Center selects the largest disk. select Disk → Folder → Create Disk Folder. 2 To create second disk folder. 4 Click Continue. select disks to be included in the new disk folder. Create a Disk Folder The Create Disk Folder wizard steps through the process of creating a disk folder. 7 Enter a folder name and any optional notes about the disk folder. the Create Disk Folder wizard asks if you are sure you want to create a second disk folder. For redundancy. select a disk folder. System Manger displays advanced options that allow you to specify tier redundancy and datapage size or to select non-redundant storage. If a tier does not contain seven disks. it must be empty of disks. users can no longer change tier redundancy to single redundant in any tier with a 1 TB or larger disk drive. Rename a Disk Folder Folder properties are available only for local. 11 Click Create Now. 3 Enter a name in the Disk Folder field.2. 1 In the System Tree. (Exception) Seven disks are the minimum requirement for configuring RAID 6 with a single spare. default redundancy is single redundant for any disk drive size. Delete a Disk Folder Before a disk folder can be deleted. 10 Select the redundancy and datapage options and click Continue. select Delete. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. Release or delete all disks within a folder before you delete the disk folder. Click Yes. Note: Default redundancy for each disk tier is based on the size of disks in the tier. System Manager asks you to confirm. With the release of Storage Center 6. managed disk folders. No folder properties are available for Unassigned or External Device folders. such as Assigned. 4 Click OK. The disk folder is created. 208 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 7 Disks 9 (Optional) Click Advanced. select Properties. The Disk Folder Properties window appears. 2 Release or delete all disks within the folder 3 From the shortcut menu. select a disk folder. select a disk folder. select Configure Storage.Managing Storage Types Managing Storage Types When Storage Center was setup. 4 Click Remove Storage Class. It is advised that you contact Dell Technical Support Services for assistance. 2 From the shortcut menu. Dell Compellent 209 . 3 Select a Storage Class. 5 Select Continue to return to Storage Type selection. Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage wizard until it is closed and reopened. If all allowed classes of storage have been created. 3 Select the Storage Class to delete. The Configure Storage wizard appears. Remove a Storage Class Removing a storage class is not allowed unless the Allow removal of storage classes user default is selected. select a disk folder. See the Storage Center System Setup Guide for more information. select Configure Storage. 4 Click Add Class. The Configure Storage wizard appears. See Also Configuring User Volume Defaults on page 317 Add a Storage Class Changes to this setting are not reflected in the Configure Storage wizard until it is closed and reopened. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. Note: System Manager warns you that before proceeding with this modification. the Add Class option does not appear. System Manager automatically selected redundancy levels depending upon size of disks in the folder. 1 In the System Tree. select a disk folder. such as Assigned. Redundant storage may be either Single Redundant or Dual Redundant. 4 Click Yes (Prepare Now). that tier and all tiers below it default to dual redundant storage.Chapter 7 Disks Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type You can prepare a disk folder for a non-standard storage type only if your User Volume defaults permit you to do so. • RAID 10 (each disk is mirrored) • RAID 5-5 (striped across 5 drives) • RAID 5-9 (striped across 9 drives) Dual-redundant storage protects against the loss of any two drives: • RAID 10 Dual-Mirror (data is written simultaneously to three separate disks) • RAID 6-6 (4 data segments. A page allowing you to select redundancy appears. select Configure Storage. The Configure Storage wizard opens. For disks that are 900GB or greater in size. 3 To add another storage type. • • 210 Single-redundant storage protects against the loss of any one drive.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . depending upon your tier redundancy configuration and disk size. 2 parity segments for each stripe) • RAID 6-10 (8 data segments. 2 parity segments for each stripe) Storage Center 6. click Prepare for Additional Storage Type. Because additional storage types decrease the efficiency of Data Progression. 5 Click Redundant or Non-Redundant. System Manager warns you that additional storage types are inefficient. 2 From the shortcut menu. 1 In the System Tree. System Manager asks if you want to Prepare for Additional Storage Type or Close. Caution: If you are considering using either the 512 KB or 4 MB datapage setting. See Also Set Storage Volume Defaults on page 322 Dell Compellent 211 . Selecting this size reduces the amount of space System Manager can present to servers. this selection is appropriate for most application program needs. It is not used until a volume is created with that Storage Type. • 4 MB: This datapage size is appropriate for configurations that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent Replays. If one disk fails. It is recommended that you only prepare a disk folder for a single datapage size to optimize disk utilization and I/O performance. The disk folder is prepared for the selected type of storage. Only prepare for additional types of storage to address specific application needs. • 2 MB: The default datapage size. all data is lost. 7 Click Prepare Now. 8 Click Close.Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type Non-Redundant storage uses RAID 0. Data is striped but provides no redundancy. contact Dell Technical Support Services so that resources remain balanced and impact on performance is considered. select the redundancy for each tier and select the datapage size to be used. Do not use non-redundant storage for a volume unless the data has been backed up elsewhere. 6 On the next page. • 512 KB: This datapage size is appropriate for application programs with high performance needs. or environments in which Replays are taken frequently under heavy I/O. • On Storage Centers with licensed Data Progression. Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the Recommended profile. Replay data is stored on RAID 5/6. It is efficient in terms of using RAID 5 or 6. Data will not migrate between tiers. RAID 5/RAID 6. the profiles that include Storage Tier 1 allow volumes to use SSD storage: • On Storage Centers without licensed Data Progression. Tier 3. High Priority limits the data stored on the highest tier of disks. Low Priority (Tier 3) The Low Priority Storage Profile provides the most-cost efficient storage. Storage Center does not migrate data to higher tiers of storage unless Tier 3 storage becomes full. which stores data on Tier 1. and Storage Profiles may not be visible to all users. the Recommended profile includes SSDs. RAID 10 (mirrored drives). If Data Progression is not licensed. data is then stored on the next lower available tier. Replay data is stored on Tier 1. Tier 2. Storage Center does not migrate data to other storage tiers unless Tier 2 storage becomes full. System Manager displays profiles in the System Tree under the Storage node. you must configure volumes to use a specific tier of storage. Make sure only volumes you want to use SSDs are assigned to the High profile. The Recommended profile allows the automatic data progression between and across all storage tiers based on data type and usage. create volumes with the Recommended Storage Profile. the High profile includes SSDs. If your user volume defaults allow you to select a Storage Profile. Tier 3. To optimize Data Progression and performance on the Storage Center. Creating a volume using the Low Priority Storage Profile stores written data on RAID 10. When Tier 1 is full. Create and apply a new profile that does not include Storage Tier 1 for all other volumes. cost and performance are optimized when all volumes use the Recommended Storage Profile. Creating a volume using the Medium Priority Storage Profile stores written data on RAID 10. but it uses more expensive media to store the data. Medium Priority (Tier 2) The Medium Priority Storage Profile provides a balance between performance and cost efficiency. Storage Center does not migrate data to lower storage tiers unless Tier 1 storage becomes full. Creating a volume using the High Priority Storage Profile stores written data on Tier 1. High Priority (Tier 1) The High Priority Storage Profile provides the highest performance. Storage Profiles Provided in System Manager If Data Progression is licensed. Replay data is stored on RAID 5/RAID 6. Reassign all other volumes to either the Medium or Low profiles. the default Storage Profile is High Priority.Chapter 7 Disks About Storage Profiles Storage Profiles provided with System Manager are the most effective way to manage data in Storage Center. access to Storage Profiles is controlled by user settings. For this reason. Recommended (All Tiers) The Recommended Storage Profile is available only when Data Progression is licensed. Without Data Progression. Tier 2. Because SSDs are automatically assigned to Storage Tier 1.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 212 Storage Center 6. You must be in Manual Mode to set up this profile. but more than nine active drives in Tier 2. Use this profile when the speed of the SSD is not required for data reads. RAID 5 Replays Manual Mode If the Storage Center has fewer than nine active drives in Tier 1. • Tier 2 – RAID 10 Writes. use Manual mode to change the stripe width. • Tier 1 – 5-wide stripe (SSD tier) • Tier 2 – 9-wide stripe Disk Folder You can manage SSD storage without creating a custom profile by creating a disk folder to isolate volumes with high IO. This method is useful for an application with a small data set but large IO requirement. SSD Best Practice This profile uses Data Progression in a standard three-tier arrangement. • Tier 1 – RAID 10 Writes • Tier 2 – RAID 5 Replays • Tier 3 – RAID 5 or RAID 6 Replays (For drives over 1 TB. Changing the stripe width helps to maintain the efficiency of both tiers. Tier 1 – RAID 10 Writes.) See Also Using Manual Storage Mode on page 218 Two-tiered Profile This profile is beneficial when the Storage Center has a limited number of SSD drives or if some data types do not need the advantage of SSD drives. placing the SSDs in Tier 1 for write operations. Dell recommends using the storage profiles provided with System Manager. such as for using solid state drives (SSDs) to improve application performance. RAID 5 Replays • Tier 3 – RAID 6 Replays Read Performance Improvement This profile uses Tier 1 for most operations. Caution: After being enabled. a storage architect may recommend using one of the following custom profiles for handling specific types of data. In some cases. Manual Mode cannot be disabled. but allows data to move to other tiers if Tier 1 fills up. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling Manual Mode. See Also Create a Disk Folder on page 207 Dell Compellent 213 . dual redundancy is implemented using RAID 6.About Storage Profiles Custom Profiles for SSDs For best performance with Data Progression. Allow Storage Profile Selection Follow these steps to configure user volume default settings to allow a user to select storage profiles. a list of available Storage Profiles will appear in the System Tree for that user. 3 Make sure Allow User to Modify Preferences is checked. 5 Select the Default Storage Profile to be used when creating a volume. 2 Click Configure User’s Volume Defaults or Configure new User’s Volume Defaults.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . existing volumes are not affected. 214 Storage Center 6. • If a user is allowed to select a Storage Profile. 6 Optionally. or changed if the option is set for a user in User Volume Defaults. System Manager applies the default Storage Profile to all new volumes and there is no list of available profiles in the System Tree. new user volumes will be created using the new settings. select a user. • If a user is not allowed to select a Storage Profile. 4 Click the Advanced tab. Note: If Data Progression is not licensed. the Recommended profile is not displayed as a choice because data cannot be migrated between tiers. check the box that enables the user to select the Storage Profile to be used. The Volume General tab displays the Storage Profile attached to a volume. If you change User Volume Defaults. 1 In the System Tree.Chapter 7 Disks Applying Storage Profiles Storage Profiles can only be selected. applied. Identify a Storage Profile The User Volume Defaults setting determines whether Storage Profile information is available. 4 Select the Storage Profile for the volume. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214 View Volumes Configured with a Storage Profile Follow these steps to see which volumes are currently using a specific Storage Profile. The System Manager asks you to confirm. and click OK. 1 From the list of Storage Profiles. 1 Select a Storage Profile. Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to multiple volumes in a single task. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214 Dell Compellent 215 . 7 Click OK. 3 Click the Storage tab. 6 Click OK. Data will be migrated during the next scheduled Data Progression run.Applying Storage Profiles Note: Changing Advanced volume defaults can adversely affect Storage Center performance. 5 Click Apply Now. select a profile. The General Storage Profile window appears. Dell Compellent recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before changing any Advanced options. 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 Click Continue. select Apply to Volume(s). select Properties. 1 Select a volume. 3 Select one or more volumes. The Storage Profile you select is applied to the selected volumes. The Volume Properties window appears. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214 Apply a Storage Profile to a Single Volume Follow these steps to apply a Storage Profile to a single volume. User volume defaults are set. A list of volumes using this profile appears. 2 Click the Volumes tab. A list of existing volumes appears. 2 From the shortcut menu. Modify a Storage Profile Follow these steps to modify an existing profile 1 In the System Tree. Data will begin to move the next time Data Progression is run. 3 Click New Profile. 10 Click Close to close the wizard. 6 Click Continue. 3 Click Modify Profile. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts. The default name is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. Accept the default or enter a new name for the Storage Profile. select Manage Storage Profiles. select Storage. 5 Click Continue. 8 (Optional) Add notes. displaying all Storage Profiles. See Also Allow Storage Profile Selection on page 214 216 Storage Center 6. Allow Storage Profile Selection must be enabled in user volume defaults. The profile is created. 1 In the System Tree. The profile is modified. You can only modify user-created profiles. Accept the default or enter a new name for the Storage Profile. 5 Select or clear RAID and tier levels.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 7 A window allowing you to name the modified Storage Profile appears. 7 Click Create Now. 6 (Optional) Add notes. 4 A window appears. 9 Click Apply Changes. 4 Select a RAID level and a storage tier.Chapter 7 Disks Managing Storage Profiles The standard Storage Profiles packaged with the Storage Center cannot be modified. 2 From the shortcut menu. displaying all Storage Profiles. 2 From the shortcut menu. select Storage. The default name is based on the RAID level and tiers of the profile. showing the RAID and Tier setting for this Storage Profile. Changes will be applied to all volumes using this profile. A window allowing you to name the Storage Profile appears. Changes to a Storage Profile will impact all volumes currently using the profile. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts. To manage Storage Profiles. Create a New Storage Profile Follow these steps to create a new storage profile. select Manage Storage Profiles. 3 Select a user-created Storage Profile. To view by whom a Profile was created.Managing Storage Profiles Delete a User-Created Storage Profile Follow these steps to delete a storage profile. To view which volumes. 5 System Manager asks you to confirm. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts. 3 Click Apply Profile. select a Storage Profile. 6 Review the list and click Apply Now to approve. if any. The General information window displays the creator. are in use. The Manage Storage Profiles wizard starts. select Storage. 6 Click Yes to delete the profile. 5 Click Continue. • In use by a volume. System Manager displays the volume and volume folders to which this profile will be applied. select Storage. Click the Volumes tab. Prerequisites You cannot delete Storage Profiles that are: • Created by the system. 1 In the System Tree. or to selected volumes. 4 Click Delete Profile. displaying all Storage Profiles. Steps 1 In the System Tree. select Manage Storage Profiles. displaying all Storage Profiles. Dell Compellent 217 . 7 Click Close to close the wizard. 2 From the shortcut menu. Apply a Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes You can apply a Storage Profile to all volumes. 2 From the shortcut menu. A list of Volumes appears. select Manage Storage Profiles. 7 Click Close to close the wizard. select a Storage Profile. 4 Select one or more volumes or volume groups. all volumes in a volume group. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . This mode should only be used with assistance from Dell Technical Support Services. 4 Enter a name or accept the default. See Viewing Background Processes on page 283. 5 Click Create Now. 2 From the shortcut menu. Manual Mode cannot be disabled. tiers. Enable Manual Storage Mode When Manual Storage Mode is enabled. click Continue. Caution: After being enabled. Note: Choices made in the Manual Mode version of the Create Storage Profile wizard override the stripe width set in System Properties. and redundancy (if any) are set. 3 When RAID levels. click Continue. 218 Storage Center 6. Storage Center asks you to name the Storage Profile. A warning window appears. Create a Storage Profile in Manual Mode Manually creating a Storage Profile is the only way to create exceptions to the stripe width set in System Properties. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services before enabling Manual Mode. The Create Storage Profile wizard starts. the Create Storage Profile wizard provides options for RAID 6 for dual-redundant storage.Chapter 7 Disks Using Manual Storage Mode Manual Storage Mode provides access to more detailed storage options. 2 To enable. 1 From the Storage Management menu. select the Storage Profiles icon. select Create Storage Profile. 1 In the System Tree. select System→ Setup→ Enable Manual Storage Mode. Storage Profiles created in Manual Mode displays all tiers. Instead of displaying the Writable and Replay tiers used. including tiers on which data will not be stored using this profile. Changes affect only system-created Storage Profiles.Using Manual Storage Mode View a Storage Profile Created in Manual Mode In contrast to Storage Profiles created in normal mode. Dell Compellent 219 . a Storage Profile that is created in Manual Mode displays more detailed information as shown below. Change RAID Stripe Width in Manual Mode If Manual Mode is enabled you can change RAID stripe width in System Storage Properties. not user-created Storage Profiles. select Show Disk in Enclosure. Managed: Part of a managed disk folder. General Disk Information When you select a disk In the System Tree. Index Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.Chapter 7 Disks User Interface Reference for Disks This section provides a description of user interface elements used to show disk information. Control Type A disk can be one of following types: Spare: Reserved for use if a disk fails. Type 220 Object type — in this case disk. disk 01-01 resides in Enclosure 1. For example. select a disk. A foreign managed disk could have been managed previously by another Storage Center or another manufacturer. Folder Disk folder in which this disk resides. Unmanaged: Disk that is recognized by Storage Center but has not yet been assigned to a managed disk folder. An unmanaged disk cannot store data. general information about the disk appears in the main window. When the disk is assigned. disk 1. Field Description Position Listed as enclosure and position.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . From the shortcut menu. Foreign Managed: Disk recognized by the Storage Center but not managed by it. The command displays the physical location of the disk. Data is striped across all drives in a managed disk folder (except reserved Hot Spares). Storage Center 6. To view the position of a disk in an enclosure. it becomes managed. 10 K. User Allocated. Disk Statistics Number of read/write requests. Product. and errors. blocks. Vendor Spec. Date Updated Date and time a user last modified or managed the disk. Free Space. Health Disk health — may be Healthy or Unhealthy. Status Disk status — may be Up or Down. and Bad Block counts for various items. System Allocated. Date Detected Date and time Storage Center detected the disk. See Also Manage Unassigned Disks on page 198 Release a Managed Disk on page 200 Delete a Disk on page 202 Show Disk Placement in an Enclosure on page 202 Dell Compellent 221 . Unallocated. Path Alert Either none or alert text.User Interface Reference for Disks Field Description Enclosure Enclosures are installed and numbered starting at the bottom of a rack. and Serial Number Product information from vendor.” Actual Capacity. such as: “Disk 5 only one path to device. 15 K. Classification Type of disk — such as 7 K. Various measures of disk capacity. or SSD. and Manufacturer Capacity Vendor. Total. Revision. Model/Revision Dell part number and revision. Unrecoverable Condition Indication of failure — may be On or Off Critical Condition Indication of failure — may be On or Off Non-Critical Condition Indication of failure — may be On or Off Storage Center 6. A Side Firmware Firmware version of EMM (or SBB). Index Number required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification.Chapter 7 Disks Disk Enclosure Information When you select an enclosure in the System Tree hardware status information appears in the main window. Status Description Disk status — may be Up or Down. B Side Firmware Firmware version of EMM (or SBB). Indicator Indicator light located on the enclosure in the rack — may be On or Off Logical ID Internal ID assigned to the enclosure Enclosure Type Type of enclosure. 222 Field Description Name Name assigned to the enclosure.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Shelf ID ID assigned with respect to other rack components. and location. The temperature gauge displays temperature zones. displays status. status. • Cooling Fans Sensors For each blower in the fan module. • Power Supplies For each power supply in the enclosure. swap detection. critical alarm tone. and if the alarm is muted. and upper and lower critical and warning temperatures. swap detection. and any bypasses. any faults. port ID. status.User Interface Reference for Disks Enclosure Hardware Status Expanding an enclosure in the System Tree displays the hardware nodes. The display shows the normal minimum and maximum temp. status. physical lane status. and fan speed code. and current temp. • Audible Alarms For each audible alarm in the enclosure. vendor and product number. high temp failures. swap detection. displays name. swap detection. status description. displays fan status. high temp warning. displays status. Dell Compellent 223 . any AC/DC failures of voltage irregularities. • Temperature Sensors For an enclosure. • IO Modules For each IO module in the enclosure. location. The Storage Center should operate in the green zone. swap detection. • Disks For each disk in the enclosure. and location. displays name. displays temp properties including position of the sensor. Chapter 7 Disks 224 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Adding Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Managing System Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Responding to the Alert Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Viewing the System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Viewing Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Restarting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Using Phone Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Shutting Down Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Monitoring Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Starting Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . However. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 System Management Most often System Management options are selected during initial Storage Center setup as described in the Storage Center System Manager Setup Guide. . . . . . 289 User Interface Reference for System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Viewing Online Storage Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents Modifying System Properties . 290 Dell Compellent 225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Changing the Storage Alert Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . many of these options can be modified by using the Storage Management menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Updating Storage Center Software . . . . . 226 Finding Unmanaged Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Configuring Local Ports . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Click OK to save any changes. 226 Storage Center 6. Rename the Storage Center Changing the system name does not have any real effect other than displaying a different name. select System→ Properties.Chapter 8 System Management Modifying System Properties Use these tasks to change system options such as the Storage Center name. RAID stripe width.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The System Properties dialog box appears. and Data Progressions. 2 Enter a new name in the field next to the Compellent logo. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Note: When using IPv6 addresses.Modifying System Properties Set the System Management IP Address The Management IP Address is used only for dual-controller configurations to run the System Manager software. If the leader fails. Storage Center uses IPv4 format for Management IP addresses. select System→ Properties. the controller addresses must be set using IPv6 prior to setting the System Management IP Address. An IPv6 address may be added. See Also Set Controller IP Properties on page 142 Dell Compellent 227 . The System Properties dialog box appears. 1 From the Storage Management menu. the controllers must already be set with IPv6 addresses. The IP Prefix Length is set in the Controller properties. the peer takes over the management IP. 2 Enter a new Management IP address. however to use IPv6 format. This IP address is always connected to the leader. Thus users can use the same IP address to access the software even when the normal leader is down. 3 Click OK to save any changes. If the Storage Center is in Emergency Mode. For RAID 5. 1 From the Storage Management menu. which distributes parity across five drives. choose between RAID 5-5. or RAID 5-9. which distributes parity across nine drives. Data that is used less is stored on RAID 6-10 (which uses an algorithm to rebuild data if one drive in the logical unit should fail). which distributes parity across 10 drives. For RAID 6. but marginally decreases vulnerability. The Storage page appears. Distributing data across fewer drives is less efficient. choose between RAID 6-6. In a standard Storage Center. 2 Click the Storage tab. but increases vulnerability. • For RAID 6. Distributing data across more drives is marginally more efficient. the stripe width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of six or ten drives. select System→ Properties. Storage Center 6. which distributes parity across six drives. or RAID 6-10. the Storage Center needs additional space to hold data before restriping it. Caution: Do not change the system-wide RAID level if the Storage Center is in Conservation Mode. Modifying this value updates the RAID 6 selections for all Storage Profiles. 228 • For RAID 5. It also modifies the RAID 6 selections for user-created Storage Profiles unless Manual Storage Mode is enabled. Although it would seem logical that changing the RAID level from fewer drives to more drives would free space. the stripe width determines whether the logical unit is comprised of five or nine drives.Chapter 8 System Management Select RAID Stripe Width The default stripe width for Storage Profiles is 10 wide (RAID 6-10). you cannot change RAID level. a percentage of most-used data is storage on RAID 10 (striped and mirrored). you will run out of free space sooner.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . If you try to change the systemwide RAID level from five or six drives to nine or ten drives. select System→ Properties. Blocks of data are then migrated up or down depending on use. select a disk folder. select a run time from the Maximum Run Time drop down menu. To view classes of tiers. Use the System Properties Data Progression tab to set the time at which Data Progression is run. Data Progression leverages cost and performance differences between storage tiers. A list of disk types by tier appears. 2 Click the Data Progression tab. 4 To limit the amount of time Data Progression runs. click the Help icon at the top of the main pane. Tier 3 the slowest. The amount of time the migration takes depends on the amount of data to be migrated. To see if your Storage Center includes Data Progression. Storage Center automatically creates tiers based on the disks in your Storage Center. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Tier 1 is fastest.Modifying System Properties About Data Progression Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. 3 Use the up and down arrows to select the time to run Data Progression. Schedule Data Progression Once every 24 hours. 5 Click OK. Dell Compellent 229 . Storage Center polls blocks to see if they have been accessed. allowing the maximum use of lower-cost drives for stored data. while maintaining highperformance drives for frequently-accessed data. If the Volume menu displays the Stop Data Progression option. select Volume. If Data Progression is running. System Manager informs you that statistics are not available while Data Progression is in progress. General volume properties are displayed in the main pane.Chapter 8 System Management Determine if Data Progression is Running When Data Progression is running.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select a volume. Data Progression is stopped. 2 Click the Statistics tab. View the Statistics tab for the volume to see if Data Progression is running. Stop Data Progression Follow these steps to stop a Data Progression currently in progress. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 230 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree. Data Progression is running. 2 Select Stop Data Progression. volume statistics are not available. 4 Select or clear the Enable Write Cache to enable or disable the write cache. Read Cache anticipates the next read and holds it in quick volatile memory. View the settings on the System Properties Cache tab. Dell Compellent 231 . 3 Select or clear the Enable Read Cache check box to enable or disable read cache. thus improving read performance. 2 Click the Cache tab. Write Cache increases write performance by holding written data in volatile memory until it can be safely stored on disk. 5 Click OK. select System→ Properties.Modifying System Properties Set System Cache System cache settings overwrite cache settings for individual volumes. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 1 From the Storage Management menu. This is the minimum number of disks to be selected in an enclosure when creating a disk folder before a Hot Spare is selected. 4 Enter the minimum number of disks for each enclosure before auto-sparing. 2 Click the Disk Sparing tab. 5 Click OK.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 Enter the default number of spares for each storage enclosure. 232 Storage Center 6. This is the number of disks that have to be selected in a Storage Center enclosure before a Hot Spare is selected.Chapter 8 System Management Configure Global Disk Spares Set Storage Center spare disk requirements using the Disk Sparing tab in the System Properties dialog box. select System→ Properties. or user requirements using the Message tab in the System Properties dialog box. 2 Click the Message tab. 1 From the Storage Management menu. usage guidelines. 4 Click OK. 3 Enter the message to appear at login. select System→ Properties.Modifying System Properties Add a Login Message Add a login message such as a disclaimer. Dell Compellent 233 . 2 Click the Info tab. 4 Click OK.Chapter 8 System Management Add Optional Information about Storage Center Add other Storage Center information using the Info tab in the System Properties dialog box. 234 Storage Center 6. 3 Enter optional information about the Storage Center.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select System→ Properties. 1 From the Storage Management menu. • If a NTP time server was previously configured. 2 Select the Region for the Storage Center from the drop-down list.Modifying System Properties Configure Date and Time Settings The Time Settings dialog box allows you to set the current region and time zone for this Storage Center or specify the NTP server to which you would like the time to be synchronized. Storage Center performs a test to make sure updates are being received from the time server. the Last NTP time server update field displays the time of the last update. 3 Select the Time Zone for the Storage Center from the drop-down list. Dell Compellent 235 . b Enter the IP Address or fully qualified domain name of the time server. • If a NTP Server has not been entered. If a NTP time server is set. If a NTP time server is not available. 5 Click OK to save the changes. Note: The options you see may vary. the Last NTP time server update field does not appear. select Configure Time Manually to set the date and time. The Time Settings dialog box appears. 4 If a NTP server is available: a Select Use NTP Time Server. 1 From the Storage Management menu. select System→ Setup→ Configure Time. If the sending host accepts this command. select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN) checkbox and complete the Login ID and Password fields. 236 Storage Center 6. the receiving host then sends it a list of SMTP extensions it understands. instead of beginning the session with the HELO command.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 6 Enter a Common Subject Line for all emails from Storage Center. 8 If the email system requires the use of an authorized login. When you select Extended Hello mode. 4 Click Test server to test the connection(s) to the mail servers. and a common subject line for all emails from Storage Center in the Common Subject Line field. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 2 Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server in the SMTP Mail Server field. 5 Enter the email address of the sender in the Sender E-mail Address (MAIL FROM) field. The Configure SMTP dialog box appears. select System→ Setup→ Configure SMTP. the receiving host issues the EHLO command.Chapter 8 System Management Configure SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a protocol for sending email messages between servers. Storage Center uses SMTP to send automated emails to an administrator account when management is required. 7 Check the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) field to configure use of extended hello for mail system compatibility. 3 Enter the IP address or fully-qualified domain name of the backup SMTP mail server in the Backup SMTP Mail Server field. and the sending host then knows which SMTP extensions it can use to communicate with the receiving host. 9 Click OK. The Send with Hello (HELO) field is grayed out. Modifying System Properties Configure iSNS Server iSNS is analogous to DNS. Dell Compellent 237 . The Configure iSNS Server dialog box appears. allowing a commodity IP network to function in a similar capacity as a storage area network. iSNS also facilitates a seamless integration of IP and Fibre Channel networks. Just as DNS provides name service for servers and workstations in a LAN. The iSNS protocol facilitates automated discovery. 3 Click OK. select System→ Setup→ Configure iSNS Server. iSNS provides intelligent storage discovery and management services comparable to those found in Fibre Channel networks. an iSNS server provides name service for initiators and targets in a SAN. This makes the task of managing the storage network easier because data is centralized on a server. management. iSNS provides value in any storage network comprised of iSCSI devices. Fibre Channel devices. or any combination thereof. and configuration of iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices on a TCP/IP network. due to its ability to emulate Fibre Channel fabric services. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Thereby. 2 Enter the IP address of the iSNS server. and manage both iSCSI and Fibre Channel devices. 4 Click OK. 1 From the Storage Management menu.Chapter 8 System Management Configure Syslog Server All syslog messages have a logging facility. select System→ Setup→ Configure Syslog Server. Local0 is the default outgoing facility. 3 From the drop-down menu. which is the location where messages are sent. 238 Storage Center 6. The syslog daemon sends messages based on the configured facility. If no facility is specified. 2 Enter the IP address of the syslog server in the SysLog Server IP Address field.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Configure SysLog Server dialog box appears. select the Syslog Facility to where the messages are sent. Modifying System Properties Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems Enterprise Manager manages data replications between Storage Centers. Use the System Setup menu to select the option to allow replications to be run. Note: Replications are managed in Enterprise Manager. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems. The Allow Replications to/from Remote Systems dialog box appears. Note: By default, Asynchronous Replication is allowed for all systems. 2 To disallow Asynchronous remote replication, use the drop-down menu to set the Allowed field to Not Allowed. 3 Click OK to make the change. Dell Compellent 239 Chapter 8 System Management Submit a License If you add applications, or increase the number of disks licensed for your Storage Center, you may need to submit a new license. The license is emailed to you from your provider. Save the license file to a host system. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Submit a License. 2 Browse to the license file location. The file is indicated by a .lic extension. 3 Select the license file. Click Load License. System Manager notifies you if the license submission was successful. Add a Controller The option to add controllers is a separately-licensed feature. Adding controllers increases fault tolerance and the ability to share the data load across controllers. All controllers in the dual-controller Storage Center must have the same physical connectivity to servers and storage enclosures to be able to share workload among them Caution: All configuration data is lost on the controller being added when the Add Controller command is accepted by the added controller. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Multi-Controller→ Add Controller to System. The Add Controller to System wizard starts. This page allows you to add a controller to a single controller system. Adding a second controller to a system adds increased fault tolerance and the ability to divide system load across both controllers. To locate the Controller ID and IP Address right click on the system root node in the Explorer view and select the Properties option. 2 Enter Controller ID, which is the numeric serial number of the controller. 3 Enter a valid IP address in the IP address field for the Ether 0 (MGMT) Interface. 4 If you use a DNS server, enter the IP address of the DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field. 240 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Modifying System Properties 5 (Optional) Add the IP address of a second DNS server in the Secondary DNS Server field. 6 Click Continue. A confirmation page appears. 7 If everything is accurate, click Join Now. System Manager joins the controller. When the added controller is joined, Storage Center opens the Startup wizard. • If there are iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configure iSCSI IO Cards on page 255. • If there are no iSCSI HBAs, continue with Configuring Local Ports on page 245. Rebalance Local Ports When you add a controller, you must rebalance the local ports so that both controllers are actively managing data IO. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Setup→ Multi-Controller→ Rebalance Ports. The Rebalance Local Ports wizard starts. 2 Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports. Access is restricted while the rebalancing process is in progress. Dell Compellent 241 Chapter 8 System Management Finding Unmanaged Hardware When System Manager finds unmanaged hardware, the Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard alerts you to this condition and directs you to the appropriate wizard for the new hardware. Manage Unassigned Disks Use the Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard to manage unassigned disks as described in these steps. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Find Unmanaged Hardware. The Found Unmanaged Hardware wizard starts. Note: To check for unmanaged hardware at startup, select the Check for unmanaged hardware on startup check box. 2 Click Manage Unassigned Disks. 3 Select the disk folder into which the disk should be placed and click Continue. 4 On the next page, select the disks to be included in the disk folder and click Continue. 5 On the next page, select the disks to be used as hot spares and click Continue. The next page displays the disk folder, hot spares, and disks in the disk folder you are modifying or creating, and attributes for each disk. Click Back to cycle through the previous pages to change hot spares or selected disks. 6 Click Add Disks Now to add the disks to the disk folder. 242 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Using Phone Home Using Phone Home After installation and setup, initial configuration information for the Storage Center is sent (Phoned Home) to Dell Technical Support Services. Note: Phone Home is available to all Storage Center customers, but response time and assistance is based on the validity and level of your support contract. Phone Home Immediately The Phone Home wizard can be used to initiate a Phone Home process and to view whether a Phone Home process is in progress. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Phone Home→ Phone Home. System Manager displays previous Phone Home events. The State column describes the event status: • Success: Phone Home was successful • Failure: Phone Home could not be completed. • Never Run: Depending upon Storage Center status, some items may not have been phoned home. • In Progress: Phone Home is currently occurring. 2 (Optional) Select the Include Detailed Logs check box to transfer extra debug logs with the phone home process. Note: Use this option only when requested by Dell Technical Support Services. 3 Click Phone Home Now. System Manager informs you that Phone Home is started. Dell Compellent 243 Chapter 8 System Management View the Phone Home Schedule Use the View menu to see the Phone Home schedule. From the View menu, select Scheduled Events. Configure a Phone Home Proxy If you plan to use a proxy server in your network, configure the Phone Home proxy server using the Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→ Phone Home→ Configure Phone Home Proxy. The Configure Phone Home Proxy wizard starts. 2 Select the Use Phone Home Proxy Server check box. 3 Enter the IP address of the proxy server, the port, user name, and password to be used when connecting to the proxy server. Confirm the password. 4 Click OK. 244 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Configuring Local Ports Configuring Local Ports Ports must be configured before you can map volumes to servers. Modifying port configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause those volumes to go offline. The operational mode of each transport type may be either Legacy Mode or Virtual Port Mode. Operational mode is selected for each transport type during initial setup. The Configure Local Ports wizard simplifies configuration and allows you to configure Legacy Mode and Virtual Port Mode local ports through a single wizard. From this wizard you can perform the following functions: • View Current Local Port Configuration on page 245. • Edit a Fault Domain on page 250. • Edit Virtual Ports on page 252. • Reset Default Port Settings on page 253. View Current Local Port Configuration Each port on the Storage Center controller is configured by transport type and for either front end or back end connectivity. The port information presented varies by operational mode and by transport type. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. The wizard displays tabs for each transport type (FC, iSCSI, and SAS) present on the Storage Center. 2 Click the tab for the transport type you want to view. Information displayed varies based on transport type and mode. Dell Compellent • Status: Up or Down. • Slot/Port: Slot and port locations. • Magnifying glass icon: Click to open the Local Port Location dialog box that displays information about the port and shows a physical view of the IO cards. • Purpose: Values for port purpose vary by transport type and by operational mode. • Fault Domain: Allows you to change the Fault Domain or set to <none>. 245 Chapter 8 System Management • World Wide Name: Unique identifier that identifies a particular FC. such as a second Storage Center acting as a server. 3 Click Assign Now to save any changes and close the wizard. Setting the value to Yes prevents the Configure Local Ports wizard from setting front-end values on FC ports attached to an enclosure. • Both Count: Number of ports that can both send and receive data. user-friendly names for physical ports. • Operational Mode: Legacy Mode or Virtual Port Mode. • Map Count: Displays the number of volumes that have been mapped to a server. • Initiator Count: Number of remote ports with a role of initiator. • Target Count: Number of remote ports with a role of target. disks show up as targets.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . iSCSI. • User Alias: Allows you to define a descriptive. The defined name is displayed as the port name in System Manager. 246 Storage Center 6. For FC and SAS. Modifying port configuration after volumes have been mapped to servers may cause those volumes to go off-line. or SAS target. Not displayed for SAS ports. • Speed: Displays port speed. • Enclosure Connected: Yes or No and is displayed only for FC ports in Virtual Port and Legacy Modes. • Slot Type: PCI card type. This greatly simplifies activities such as merging fault domains. you must reconfigure the server-side iSCSI initiators before service can be resumed. To use multi-pathing. in the event of any failure. such as MPIO. • A virtual port fault domain value is changed automatically when the preferred physical port fault domain is changed or when the virtual port is moved to a new preferred physical port. volumes can be mapped to ports in more than one fault domain. its control port will change. • Reserved ports assume data load transfer in the event of a failed primary port. • Reserved ports are also used for inter-process communication (IPC) traffic and Replication. • Primary ports are designated for data traffic. 247 . • Primary and reserved ports are assigned the same fault domain ID (an arbitrary number) to designate where traffic will be moved in the event of a failover or rebalance. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain. • With multi-pathing software on a server. Dell Compellent • Although each virtual port is assigned a preferred physical port. • Front-end ports of the same transport type (iSCSI or FC) can be in a single fault domain. Virtual Port Mode In Virtual Port Mode. you should be aware of the following concepts.Configuring Local Ports About Fault Domains (FC and iSCSI only) Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller or port fails. all ports are available for IO. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain. • Fault domains group primary and reserved front-end ports to each other. make sure that the server has software. ports are reserved for use in the event of a primary port failure. Caution: For iSCSI only. servers initiate IO to iSCSI ports through the fault domain’s control port. to manage multi-pathing. In the event of a port failure. IO traffic is routed to an operating port. a virtual port can fail over to another physical port within the fault domain. • To reduce network broadcast interference. This change disrupts any service initiated through the previous control port. configure Storage Center Ethernet and iSCSI ports into a separate VLAN. When working with fault domains. Dual-controller Legacy Mode In Legacy Mode. 248 Storage Center 6. 1 From the Storage Management menu. The Edit Fault Domains page appears. 2 Click Edit Fault Domains. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 8 System Management Create a Fault Domain Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to create a new fault domain. 3 Click Create Fault Domain. select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. Configuring Local Ports 4 Enter a name for the new fault domain. 7 Click Continue. 8 Click Create Now. 6 (Optional) Add notes. A confirmation page appears. 5 Select a connection type. Dell Compellent 249 . gateway. net mask. the Fault Domain Properties this page displays an IP Settings tab on which you can view and reset the IP address for the control port of the new iSCSI fault domain. If the transport type is iSCSI. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 250 Storage Center 6. The Edit Fault Domains page appears. 5 Enter a new domain name and optional notes for the domain.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. and port number 6 Click OK.Chapter 8 System Management Edit a Fault Domain Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to edit fault domains. The Fault Domain Properties wizard starts. 2 Click Edit Fault Domains. 4 Click Edit Fault Domain. 3 Select a Fault Domain from the list. or if the fault domain is in use. 3 Select a Fault Domain from the list. 1 From the Storage Management menu. exit the Edit Fault Domains wizard.Configuring Local Ports Delete a Fault Domain You can only delete a Fault Domain if it is not currently assigned to any ports. move affected ports to a different fault domain. 2 Click Edit Fault Domains. an error message appears. and begin the procedure again. Dell Compellent 251 . select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. A confirmation prompt appears. 5 If the domain is not in use. 4 Click Delete Domain. The Edit Fault Domains page appears. If the domain is in use. click OK to delete the domain. Storage Center controllers are in an Unbalanced state. select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. 5 If the physical port of a virtual port does not match its preferred physical port. the virtual port’s fault domain is automatically changed to reflect the fault domain of the new preferred physical port. The next page opens. 3 Scroll to the right side of the page and select the preferred physical port from the dropdown menus. Right-click on the Controllers node in the System Tree and select Rebalance Local Ports to open the Rebalance Local Ports wizard and rebalance the ports. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 4 Click Apply Changes to confirm your edits or Return to return to Configure Local Ports. When moving a virtual port to a different preferred physical port.Chapter 8 System Management Edit Virtual Ports The Virtual Ports option appears on the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard only if the Operational Mode is Virtual Port Mode and the transport type is FC or iSCSI.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . and only with a valid license for Virtual Ports. 252 Storage Center 6. click Edit Virtual Ports. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. Use this option to modify the preferred physical port of a virtual port. 2 On the first page of the Configure Local Ports wizard. Configuring Local Ports Reset Default Port Settings Use the Configure Local Ports wizard to reset all port settings to the default values. Caution: Resetting the port configuration to default settings overrides existing port configurations and does not attempt to preserve the current connection state of servers attached to the Storage Center. The Configure Local Ports wizard starts. Dell Compellent 253 . 2 Click Reset Defaults to generate the default port configuration for the selected transport. 3 Click Yes to reset and No the reject setting local ports back to their default values. 1 From the Storage Management menu. • If volumes are currently mapped by transport type. the wizard prompts you to confirm. the wizard displays a warning and prompts you to confirm. select System→Setup→ Configure Local Ports. • If no volumes are currently mapped by transport type. This process may cause volumes to go offline. a confirmation message is returned and the conversation process begins. 2 Click Yes. an error message explaining the error is returned and the conversion process is canceled.Chapter 8 System Management Convert to Virtual Ports Before FC local ports can be converted to Virtual Port Mode. The Storage Center checks to see if the selected transport types are eligible for converting. support for N_Port ID Virtualization (NPIV) Mode must be turned on for all front-end FC IO cards. select System→ Setup→ VIrtual Ports→ Convert to Virtual Ports. 5 Click Continue. A dialog box appears asking you to confirm turning on NPIV Mode for front-end FC IO cards. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Do this prior to converting to Virtual Port Mode to allow the FC IO cards to communicate with the switches and determine if NPIV is supported. all transport types are selected. Storage Center 6. 3 From the Storage Management menu. select System→ Setup→ Virtual Ports→ Convert to Virtual Ports→ NPIV Mode On All FC IO Cards→ Turn On NVIP Mode. The Convert to Virtual Ports wizard starts. 254 • If the conversion pre-check finds errors.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 4 Select the transport types (FC or iSCSI) to convert to Virtual Ports. Note: By default. • If no errors are found. 3 Click Save Configuration to configure the iSCSI IO card. If any IO cards have not been configured. the wizard closes automatically. A progress page appears showing configuration and port refresh progress. If iSCSI cards were not configured as part of initial setup. subnet mask. and gateway values before the IO cards can be used. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard simplifies iSCSI IO card configuration by allowing you to configure cards through a single screen. 1 From the Storage Management menu.0. 4 When configuration is complete. Note: Uninitialized cards display an IP Address of 0.0. select System→ Setup→ Configure iSCSI IO Cards. use the wizard to configure both initialized and initialized cards. subnet mask. 2 Enter IP address.0.Configuring Local Ports Configure iSCSI IO Cards All iSCSI IO cards must be assigned static IP address. and gateway values for all IO cards. a warning message is displayed. Select Yes to leave the IO cards uninitialized. The Configure iSCSI IO Cards wizard starts. Dell Compellent 255 . 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard starts by asking if Network Address Translation (NAT) has been configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. Note: Storage Center does not support Remote iSCSI Compellent Connections with NATed IP Addresses when either machine is running in Virtual Port mode. 1 From the Storage Management menu. • Click No if NAT is not configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. • Click Yes if NAT is configured between the local Storage Center and the remote Storage Center. 2 Enter the required information and click Continue. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the required NATed IP addresses and iSCSI names for each iSCSI IO card in the remote Storage Center. The remote connections are added. 256 Storage Center 6. select System→ Setup→ Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections.Chapter 8 System Management Add iSCSI Remote Connections Use the Add iSCSI Remote Compellent Connections wizard to set up IP addresses for remote connections. The next page of the wizard allows you to enter the IP addresses. • Configure the SNMP Server on page 262. By default. • Generate a New SSL Certificate on page 263. If an IP Filter does not permit access to Admin users. Access menu options allow you to: Dell Compellent • Create IP Filter for Current User on page 258 • Create an IP Filter on page 259. the wizard will not be able to determine if an Access IP Filter exists for the current User Name and IP Address. If you use IP filtering. Make sure that the IP filters grant sufficient access to all System Manager users. you must use it to control all Storage Center access. IP filtering is off. it is possible to lock yourself out. • Reset the License Acceptance on page 265. Storage Center infers that no one has access except for the specific access granted in the IP filter. The address is not necessarily the same as the local IP address of the machine you use to access the Storage Center. Caution: Be careful when configuring IP Filters.Managing System Access Managing System Access IP filtering creates access control lists either by user type or by a specific user. After you create an IP filter. • Configure a Secure Console on page 263. access is denied. implying an Allow Any rule. If you use network address translation (NAT). 257 . be sure to specify the IP address that is seen by Storage Center. If there is no specific allow rule. IP filtering creates an Allow Access Control List. In this case. System Manager notifies you if there is no filter for the current user name and IP address and warns you that you must include this information to have access at the next login. 1 From the Storage Management menu. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. If you are using Network Address Translation (NAT). warnings appear cautioning you to use the address that is seen by the Storage Center 3 After you have double checked all information.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Changes take affect at the next login. 2 Click Create Filter for this User on the first page of the Manage IP Filters wizard.Chapter 8 System Management Create IP Filter for Current User Use this option to create an IP Filter for the current login and IP address. 258 Storage Center 6. A summary showing the IP filter that will be created for the current user name and IP address appears. click Create Now to create the access rule filter. Changes take affect at the next login. A dialog box appears that allows you to set a privilege level for a group of users or for a specific user. • Click Specific User to select a privilege level for a specific user. 4 Click Continue.Managing System Access Create an IP Filter Use this option to create an IP Filter for a specific user or for all users. 3 Choose from the following: • Click User Privilege Level to select a privilege level for all users. 1 From the Storage Management menu. select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. Dell Compellent 259 . an IP address. The next page that appears allows you to select a single host. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. or a range of IP addresses for the filter. 2 Click Create IP Filter. 6 Click Continue. A summary appears showing the attributes of the filter you are about to create. 7 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. 8 Click New Filter to create another filter.Chapter 8 System Management 5 Make a selection for the IP filter.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . If single or range is selected. enter the associated IP address or range of IP addresses for the filter. 260 Storage Center 6. A confirmation page appears displaying all current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter. or click Close to finish. 3 Select a filter from the list. A summary appears showing the attributes of the filter you are about to create. a warning message appears. 5 Click Continue. 1 From the Storage Management menu. The IP address page appears.Managing System Access Modify an IP Filter Use this option to change an IP Filter. Dell Compellent 261 . Delete an IP Filter Use this option to delete an IP Filter. 3 Select a filter from the list. A confirmation page appears displaying all current IP filter(s) including the newly created filter. select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. 4 Click Continue to delete the filter. a warning message appears. 2 Click View Existing Filters. 9 Click Close to finish. Changes take affect at the next login. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. and select Modify Filter. A dialog box appears listing the current filters. 6 Enter the IP address or the range of addresses. select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Manage IP Filters. 4 Modify the filter by selecting the user privilege level or the specific user. 5 Click Close to finish. Do not delete an IP filter that provides access for the current user ID and IP address. If deletion of the selected filter would disallow all access for the current user name and IP address. A dialog box appears listing the current filters. If a modification would disallow all access for the current user name and IP address. The Manage IP Filters wizard starts. 7 Verify all information and click Continue. 2 Click View Existing Filters. and select Delete Filter. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 8 Click Create Now to finish creating the filter. in the same way as for Create an IP Filter on page 259. as well as the more recently defined traps (organized by function). select System→ Access→ IP Filtering→ Access Violation Viewer. 1 From the Storage Management menu. which reports failures by: • User Name • IP Address • Time 2 To remove an entry. Selecting this option causes the Storage Center SNMP Agent to send deprecated traps (organized by severity). select it from the list and click Remove. 11 Click OK. 10 Click Start Trap.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 7 Enter Trap Port. Configure the SNMP Server The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol monitors the Storage Center over the network. 1 From the Storage Management menu. The Configure SNMP Server dialog box appears. The agent needs to be running for external SNMP-enabled devices to communicate with the SNMP Agent. Enter the IP address of the Network Management System that is collecting trap information. 3 Enter a Read Write Community String. 8 Select a Trap Type from the drop-down menu. Enter the port number of the Network Management System. 9 Select or clear the Enable Deprecated Traps check box. Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from the SNMP agent. The Access Failures dialog box appears. Enter a password used to allow Network Management Systems to read from or write to the SNMP agent.Chapter 8 System Management View Access Violations This report displays records of access failures to this Storage Center. 5 Enter Trap Community String. Enter a password used to allow SNMP agent to communicate with the Network Management System. 262 Storage Center 6. 6 Enter a Trap Destination. This option is typically not enabled. select System→ Access→ Configure SNMP Server. The trap type is used by the SNMP Agent to send trap data from the Network Management System. 2 Enter a Read Only Community String. 4 Click Start Agent. Managing System Access Configure a Secure Console A secure console allows support personnel to access a Storage Center console using SSH without connecting through the serial port. Note: Do not modify the secure console configuration without the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services. 1 From the Storage Management menu. If a proxy server is dependent on Storage Center. when connecting to Storage Center. correcting the mismatch. • From the Storage Management menu. Disable Secure Console Access If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard. You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. 3 For additional information. options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on the Storage Management→ System→ Access menu. The Configure Secure Console wizard starts. If this is the case. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated. and the rest of the names will become subjectAltNames in the certificate. Restart Secure Console Access If secure console access was enabled through the Configure Secure Console wizard. the machine cannot Phone Home or connect through SSH as it is booting. System Manager warns you not to modify the secure console without the assistance of Dell Technical Support Services. Generate SSL at Startup If prompted. select System→ Access→ Disable Secure Console. enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your browser. The initial certificate shipped with the Storage Center will have a common name that may not match the IP address or DNS host name assigned to the Storage Center. This command closes the current connection. contact Dell Technical Support Services. select System→Access→Configure Secure Console. options to restart or disable secure console access to the Storage Center are available on the Storage Management→ System→ Access menu. Generate a New SSL Certificate The SSL certificate must match the Storage Center's IP Address or DNS host name. a message will be displayed identifying a mismatch between the IP address or DNS host name in the certificate and the IP address or DNS host name of the Storage Center. Import the correct certificate or generate a new certificate to correct this. A machine used as a proxy server for Phone Home cannot be dependent upon Storage Center itself. 2 If you are being assisted by Dell Technical Support Services. Dell Compellent 263 . click Continue. select System→ Access→ Restart Secure Console. • From the Storage Management menu. The first name will become the Common Name. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with this IP Address or DNS name. pem) file. 2 Click Import. select System→ Access→ Manage SSL Certificate.pem) file and must be in x. 5 Navigate to and select the existing private key file (*. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts. 4 Click Next. 6 Click Next. A summary page appears that identifies the key files selected. 7 Click Save to import the certificates.509 format 1 From the Storage Management menu.Chapter 8 System Management Import an Existing Certificate Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to import an existing certificate. The public key file must be in x. 3 Navigate to and select the existing public key (*.509 format. The existing certificate must be a public key file (*.pem).3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 264 Storage Center 6. The first name will become the Common Name. 1 From the Storage Management menu. You must log on again after the new certificate is generated. The Reset License Acceptance dialog box opens. and the rest of the names will become subjectAltNames in the certificate. select System→ Access→ Manage SSL Certificate.Managing System Access Generate SSL Using System Manager Use the Generate New SSL Certificate wizard to generate a new certificate. 2 Click Yes (Reset Now). 3 Enter the IP Address or DNS name of Storage Center as you refer to it in your browser. Dell Compellent 265 . select System→ Access→ Reset License Acceptance. 1 From the Storage Management menu. You will have to close your web browser windows to continue. Caution: Generating a new certificate will close the current connection. This command closes the current connection. 2 Click Generate to create and install the new certificates. You may include a list of names and IP addresses separated by commas. The Manage SSL Certificate wizard starts. Storage Center generates a new certificate set with this IP Address or DNS name. correcting the mismatch. Reset the License Acceptance Follow these steps to reset the license acceptance. 4 Click Generate Now. is a drive that can: 266 • Process IOs and other commands while receiving firmware blocks. Service Affecting Service Optional Storage Center with a Single Controller Storage Center Firmware Update Yes Enclosure Firmware Update Yes Yes Yes Yes Depending on the components for a specific release. Deferrable components can be installed at a later time.Chapter 8 System Management Updating Storage Center Software Storage Center updates are bundled together as a single downloadable update package. The following table shows which components affect service during installation. An update package includes the latest updates for the following Storage Center software and firmware: • Storage Center System Manager software • Storage Center firmware • Enclosure firmware • Disk firmware Types of Components Within an update package. an individual update component is classified by how the update component can be installed. Storage Center 6. A drive that supports an in-service upgrade. Service Optional components can be installed either when the Storage Center is in service or during a scheduled outage. • Service Affecting or Service Optional: Service Affecting components can be installed only when the Storage Center is temporarily taken out-of-service. enclosure firmware may or may not be Service Optional. • Boot and ready new firmware in three seconds.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Required or Deferrable: Required components must be installed as part of the update. Disk Firmware Update Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting or non-service affecting depending on the drive. Disk Firmware Update Disk firmware upgrades may be service affecting or non-service affecting depending on the drive. A drive that supports an in-service upgrade.Updating Storage Center Software Service Affecting Service Optional Storage Center with Dual Controllers Storage Center Firmware Update Enclosure Firmware Update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Depending on the components for a specific release. • Boot and ready new firmware in three seconds. enclosure firmware may or may not be Service Optional. 267 . is a drive that can: Dell Compellent • Process IOs and other commands while receiving firmware blocks. It also provides links to all the operations needed to check for. you can manually check for updates by using the Check for Updates menu option. a new Storage Center is configured to automatically check for update packages. Click Download Now to download the update. download. Update Status Messages The following table for provides details on possible messages in Update Status display. Click Install Update to install the update. • Controller Down: A controller is down. The links provided depend upon the status of the update process. Installation cannot proceed when a controller is down. • Installing Update: Storage Center is currently installing an update. verify. • Update Ready to Install: A downloaded update is ready to install. • Validating Components: Storage Center is currently verifying each component status to determine if a component is ready for installation. select System→ Update→ Check for Update. Storage Center 6. • Update Available for Download: An update is available for download. 1 From the Storage Management menu. When Storage Center is finished checking for updates. Download Update. 2 Click Check Now. New Package Version Version of the OS ready to download or install.Chapter 8 System Management Check for an Update Package By default. and install Storage Center updates. Current Package Version OS version currently running on the Storage Center. • Error Checking or Downloading: An error occurred during Check Update or Download Update.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Click Install Report to view details on the installation error. • No Updates Available: Last Check Update process found no available updates. However. An upgraded Storage Center retains the existing configuration setting for automatic updates. or Install Update process: • Checking for Update: Storage Center is currently checking for updates. 268 Field Description Current Update Status Current status of the Check Update. the system displays the current status of the update process. • Downloading Update: Storage Center is currently downloading an update. Click Check Now to check again for updates. • Error Installing Update: An error occurred while installing an update component. if any. Update Status Actions Depending on the reported status. that occurred during installation. Validate Components Validate update components. See Also Configure Automatic Updates on page 270 Dell Compellent 269 .Updating Storage Center Software Field Description Service Affecting Indicates whether package installation affects Storage Center service: Controller Reset • Yes: Package installation affects Storage Center service. Installation Errors Shows the number of installation errors and warnings. the controllers are rebooted in sequence. If the upgrade is not service-affecting. Last Check Time Shows the date and time when Storage Center last successfully checked for updates. Validation Errors Shows the number of validation warnings or errors. Details View details for a downloaded update package. • For a clustered-controller Storage Center: If the upgrade is service-affecting. • Deferrable: Package contains service-affecting components that can be installed at a later time. encountered during a Validate update process. the following buttons appear: Click … To … Check Now Check for updates. • No: Package installation does not affect Storage Center service. the controllers are rebooted simultaneously. Install Update Install the downloaded update package. if any. Indicates whether the update package installation requires rebooting the controllers: • For a single-controller Storage Center: rebooting the controller always affects service. the results are displayed in the Update Status dialog box. To download the latest update software package. select System→ Update→ Update Status. • Download software updates automatically and notify me: Select to automatically download updates and receive notification when the download is complete. • Never check for software updates (Phone Home not available): Select to prevent System Manager from ever checking for updates either automatically or manually. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 3 Click OK. you can: • Click Download Now.Chapter 8 System Management Manually Download an Available Update You can check for and download software updates at any time. Configure Automatic Updates You can set up Storage Center to automatically download software updates. 2 Select the update option: • Do not automatically check for software updates: Select this option to disable automatic checking for updates. The Update Status wizard starts. select System→ Update → Configure Automatic Updates. 270 Storage Center 6. Updates are not downloaded until you explicitly download the update. status appears in the Update Status wizard.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Select Check Now to check for updates. The Configure Automatic Updates wizard starts. This option is for secure sites at which Phone Home is not available. When Storage Center is finished checking for updates. 2 Depending on the status of the currently software. 1 From the Storage Management menu. As Storage Center downloads the update. • Notify me of a software update but do not download automatically: Select to automatically check for updates and receive notification when an update is available. that further describe the update component. Column Description Component Name of component to be updated. Update Type Indicates whether the installation of the update component is required or deferrable: Message Dell Compellent Type of component to be updated: • • Required: Update must be applied. The Update Details page provide details for all components included in the update package. The Update Details page appears. you can view details for the package prior to installing the package. Update Count Number of components on the Storage Center to which the update component applies. For example. Schedule a service outage to apply the update. • Deferrable Service Affecting: Update is deferrable and applying the update affects service on all systems. • Installed: Component has been installed. • Disk: Component updates disk firmware.Updating Storage Center Software View Update Package Details When a downloaded update package is ready to install. • Deferrable Service Optional: Update is deferrable and applying the update can be done either without affecting service or during a scheduled service outage. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 271 . • Enclosure: Component updates enclosure firmware. if any. 2 Click Details. Shows information messages. shows 1 for a single-controller Storage Center and 2 for a dualcontroller Storage Center. for a controller firmware update. Version Version number of the update component. The Update Status wizard starts. Status Status of the component update: • Ready for Update: Component is ready for update. select System→ Update→ Update Status. Type Storage Center: Component updates Storage Center software. 1 After downloading an update packages. view the Update Type column for each component: For this Update Type … Apply Update Options Include … Required Deferrable Service Affecting Component must be installed. does not require a system boot. installation reboots the controllers in sequence or simultaneously.Chapter 8 System Management Decide How to Apply Updates Within an update package. you should be aware of the following: • The installation process automatically reboots Storage Center controller(s) when required by the components being updated. A service outage is required when controllers are rebooted simultaneously. • For a single-controller Storage Center. 272 Storage Center 6. depending on the components being updated. b Click Details. view the Update Details: a From the Storage Management menu. The Update Status wizard starts. Applying the update affects service on all Storage Centers. Upgrading is a software-controlled process. when applied in-service. Before installing an upgrade. Deferrable Service Optional Component installation can be deferred. the update component can be performed without disruption of service. 2 On the Update Details page. plan for and schedule a service outage during which to apply the updates. determine how to apply the updates: • If you intend to install components that affect service. plan for applying the updates during a time at which the Storage Center is least busy. • For a dual-controller Storage Center. the update component affects service. an individual update component is classified by how the update component can be installed. • If you intend to install components that do not affect service. Note: Do not manually restart the Storage Center controllers during the upgrade process. Component installation can be deferred. The Update Details page appears. Schedule a service outage to apply the update. • For dual-controller Storage Centers. select System→ Update→ Update Status. You may also want to install components that are service optional during the schedule outage. Applying the update can be done either without affecting service or during a scheduled service outage.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Disk firmware. 3 After viewing the Update Type for all components included in the update package. 3 Click OK. When the controllers are restarted. When the first controller is up.Restarting Storage Center Restarting Storage Center These steps describe how to restart a controller using the System Manager. ports are unbalanced and System Manager asks you to re-balance the ports. When both controllers are running again. Note: If the controllers fail to power down. hold down the physical power button on the front of the controller until it powers off (approximately 8 seconds). they may or may not be unbalanced. select System→ Shutdown/Restart. • Restart Simultaneously shuts both controllers down simultaneously and then brings them back on line. System Manager shuts down the first controller. select Restart in Sequence or Restart Simultaneously. This causes an outage. Dell Compellent 273 . Use this method to restart controllers without shutting down the entire Storage Center. and then restarts the first controller. 2 For a dual-controller configuration. 1 From the from the Storage Management menu. • Restart in Sequence does not cause an outage. System Manager shuts down and restarts the second controller. 1 Phone Home to Dell Technical Support Services. d When all items have been sent successfully. Prepare to Shut Down Storage Center Before shutting down Storage Center hardware. Always halt all IO to the controllers before shutting down a Storage Center. a From the Storage Management menu. select System→ Phone Home→ Phone Home. Once completed.Chapter 8 System Management Shutting Down Storage Center Shutting down a Storage Center creates a system outage. The Phone Home wizard starts. Phone Home current information. select System→ Properties.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . for example to replace hardware. The System Manager displays previous Phone Home events. c Click OK. a From the Storage Management menu. Use this process only as directed. or to shut down for data center power maintenance. 2 Disable the global system cache settings to flush all cached data to disk. and stop all IO as described in these steps. this status changes to Success if the Phone Home has completed successfully. Storage Center should be always be shut down in an orderly process by turning off controllers and all associated components in the order described in this section. b Click Phone Home Now. disable cache settings. the Phone Home wizard shows the status of In Progress. or Failure if the Phone Home could not be completed. click Close. b Click the Cache tab. 3 Shut down all attached servers so that all IO is completely stopped. For each item being sent. See Also Set System Cache on page 231 Using Phone Home on page 243 274 Storage Center 6. c Clear the Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes d Click OK. during which time no IO is processed. to move the Storage Center to another location. Note: If the controllers do not shut down. 3 Click OK. Dell Compellent 275 . select System→ Shutdown/Restart. 1 From the Storage Management menu. Both controllers shut down.Shutting Down Storage Center Shut Down Controllers Use the System Manager to shut down controllers in the Storage Center. turn off the power supplies simultaneously. press and hold the power button on the front of each controller unit they turn off (about five seconds). Press each power switch on the rear of the enclosure. The Shutdown/Restart wizard starts. causing a system outage. Shut Down Enclosures Each enclosure has two power supplies. which must physically be turned off. When possible. 2 Select Shutdown from the drop-down menu. select System→ Properties. resume IO. Turn on Controllers Turn on each controller and then log on System Manager to finish the controller start up process. 276 Storage Center 6. 3 For dual-controller systems. Finish Startup After the controllers are running and ports are balanced. If the prompt does not appear. and finish by Phoning Home. 1 Enable the global system cache settings. The fans turn on as an indication that the controller is starting to come up.Chapter 8 System Management Starting Storage Center These steps describe how to start a Storage Center that has been completely shut down. 1 Simultaneously press both power switches on the rear of the enclosure to turn on the enclosure. Prerequisites Make sure that all disks are up and spinning at full speed before turning on any controllers. c Select both Enable Read Cache and Enable Write Cache check boxes. respond Yes to the prompt to rebalance local ports. 3 Make sure all hosts are back online and verify all volumes are mapped to the Storage Center. waiting for the disks to spin up between enclosures. log on to the Storage Center using System Manager. a From the Storage Management menu. b Click the Cache tab. 2 After the controllers have finished booting. Steps 1 Turn on each controller by pressing and holding the power button on the front of the controller.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 2 Resume IO by turning on all servers that use the Storage Center. 4 Phone Home from Storage Center to Dell Technical Support Services. b Click Continue to begin rebalancing local ports. follow these steps to rebalance local ports. reset the cache settings. a Right-click on the Controllers node in the System Tree and select Rebalance Local Ports. d Click OK. The Rebalance Local Ports wizard starts. 2 Repeat with each enclosure attached to the Storage Center. Turn on Enclosures Turn on each enclosure attached to the Storage Center and allow the disks to spin up to full speed before turning on other enclosures and the controllers. The Available Storage Summary is displayed in the main pane. Total Disk Space displays the sum of all disk drives in each disk folder. Total disk space Total space for each disk folder. Storage Center allocates additional space. 2 Select Available Storage Summary. Because space on a spare drive is not used until another drive fails. Total space allocated for volume use Total space minus overhead. The total capacity of the disk folder is the sum of the capacities of the drives within the folder. As more space is used. it sends an alert. its capacity is not included in the total capacity for the disk folder. Disk folders also contain spare drives. Generally there is only one disk folder. reserved to replaced a failed drive. 1 From the Storage Center View menu. Disk folders can contain a mixture of drive types. A disk folder is a logical grouping of physical drives with similar page sizes and redundancy. When Storage Center has no more space to allocate. capacities. and reports.Viewing Online Storage Summary Viewing Online Storage Summary The Online Storage tab displays various storage summaries. select Online Storage. View Available Storage Summary The Available Storage Summary tab displays disk space usage for each disk folder. Dell Compellent Field Description Status Indication if you need to add storage — may be Normal or Disk Low. trends. and speeds. 277 . Allocated space used by volumes Storage Center allocates disk space based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. Unhealthy/Bad disk space Number of unusable bad disk sectors on disks. Unallocated disk space Space not allocated. When Storage Center has no more space to allocate. if any. Storage Center allocates additional space.Chapter 8 System Management Field Description Free allocated space Storage Center allocates disk space based on the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. if any. Space reserved by system Space reserved for system overhead. Spares and space available Number and capacity of spares. As more space is used.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 278 Storage Center 6. if any. not used. Total free space Total of Free allocated space and Unallocated disk space. it sends an alert. Number of unmanaged disks Number of unmanaged disks. The Storage Consumption Trends are displayed in the main pane.Viewing Online Storage Summary View Storage Consumption Trends The Storage Consumption Trends report displays the history of storage consumption for each disk folder and each class of disk. The trends indicate which disks are getting increased use. 2 Click the Storage Consumption Trends tab. showing consumption by disk folder and disk class. Storage trends by disk class can help you decide which disks to add if a Storage Center needs additional space. select Online Storage. 1 From the View menu. Dell Compellent 279 . Storage Center writes data to the next lower class. select Online Storage. 1 From the View menu. Using Storage Profiles. For each tier. The Data Progression Pressure Report displays: • Space available in a disk folder. a volume that contains only Replays might be stored on a lower disk tier. • Total space allocated from this tier across all types of storage. the Data Progression Pressure Report displays: 280 • Space available in tier. For example. 2 Click the Data Progression Pressure Reports tab. For each storage type. 3 Select a date and time in the Sample Time drown-down menu. By default. Data Progression Pressure Reports can display data from the previous 30 days so that you can see how Data Progression has moved data between RAID types and disk tiers. Disk folders cannot share space. • Space allocated to this type of storage.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Space allocated to this type of storage. If a disk class is full. you can create volumes that reside only on one disk class.Chapter 8 System Management View Data Progression Pressure Reports Use the Data Progression Pressure Report to make decisions about the types of disks to add to a Storage Center. the Data Progression Pressure Reports displays how space is allocated and consumed across different RAID types and storage tiers. Storage Center using Data Progression gradually migrates data down from high-end drives to be stored on low-end drives. • Total space allocated across all types of storage. Storage Center 6. the amount that will be moved down. the amount that will be moved up. Moving Up In the next Data Progression cycle. Saved as RAID 10 Amount of space saved by moving less-accessed data to RAID 5 rather than using RAID 10 for all data. Chart Bar chart displaying allocated space and space consumed. Volume Used Amount of space used by volumes after RAID is applied. the amount that is in use by volumes. Disk Allocated Space reserved for volumes. Disk Used From the amount allocated. Indicated in the bar chart by a green bar and up arrow. 281 . Within each tier.Viewing Online Storage Summary Click on a column head to sort data in that column. Volume Allocated Amount of space presented for the use by volumes after RAID is applied. Moving Down In the next data progression cycle. the Data Progression Pressure Report information includes: Dell Compellent Field Description RAID Level Level in the tier. Indicated in the bar chart by an orange bar and a down arrow. Track Type of track — may be Fast or Standard. If all the Replays were expired. select Online Storage. they take up space. the Online Storage view also has reports for: 282 • Available Storage Summary • Storage Consumption Trends • Data Progression Pressure Reports Storage Center 6. The Volume Distribution Report displays logical space consumed by a volume and additional space this volume is consuming because of the existence of Replays. It details growth rate trends for both the volume and the associated Replays. In addition. a volume and all of its Replays might consume 10 GB of space. For example.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Because Replays contain information about changes that occurred on a volume over time. In this case.Chapter 8 System Management View Volume Distribution Reports Volume Distribution Reports display the amount of storage space each volume is consuming. the volume would only consume 8 GB of space. The volume distribution report can help you recover space by identifying logical and physical space. Information includes space allocated for a volume and the amount of space actually consumed. The Volume Distribution Report is displayed in the main pane. 2 Click the Volume Distribution Report tab. 1 From the View menu. the Replay overhead is 2 GB. 2 Use the drop-down menus to filter the content of the log to be retrieved. Monitor and manage these processes from the Background Processes view. 4 Click OK. run as background processes.Viewing Background Processes Viewing Background Processes Many Storage Center tasks. Select from the following: • Date and time between which to view logs • Message level greater than. select Background Processes. configuration. 1 From the View menu. Background processes information appears. such as Replications. lesser than. name of controller • Subsystem 3 Select or clear the check box to display system-level messages. Viewing the System Log The System Log is a record of all status messages from the Storage Center. or debug • In a clustered-controller configuration. From the View menu. or equal to a warning. select System Log. The Filter Log Messages wizard starts. Dell Compellent 283 . this indicates a condition that requires immediate attention.Chapter 8 System Management Responding to the Alert Monitor Alerts warn you when Storage Center requires attention. This indicates a condition of which you should be aware. This category exists to allow you to keep a record of any past conditions that have occurred on the Storage Center. Storage Center 6. Alert Categories Alert Description Alert This category contains normal alerts. This category exists to isolate these alerts from alerts that occur during normal operation.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . but are not functioning to their full capability. Items in this condition may operate in degraded mode indefinitely. Indication This category contains alerts that are for informational purposes only. The System Status icon returns to green when all alerts higher than Inform are acknowledged. a record that it occurred can be found under the Alert History category. • Red (Critical): The System Status icon is red when an alert exists that has a status of Down. The type of the alert is indicated by the icon that appears before the alert message. History This category contains a history of the normal alerts that appeared and were cleared automatically. Maintenance. Alert Indicators Alerts occur in various types depending upon the area of the Storage Center affected. • Yellow (Warning): The System Status icon is yellow when an alert exists that has a status of Degraded or Unavailable. The current status of the Storage Center is indicated by the color of the System Status icon in the top-right corner of System Manager. They are also being actively monitored and will clear themselves automatically should the situation that has caused them corrects itself. Maintenance This category contains any alerts that occur while the Storage Center's Operation Mode is set to Install. • Green (Normal): The System Status icon is green when no alerts exist. These alerts exist to warn you about a condition on the Storage Center that may require direct user intervention to correct. Degraded Indicates an item on the Storage Center is currently operating in a degraded mode. or Emergency. Critical Indicates an item on the Storage Center is in a critical state and may be nearing failure. After an alert of this type becomes cleared. These alerts represent current issues present on the Storage Center. Alert Status 284 Status Description Complete Indicates that an operation on the Storage Center has completed. Down Indicates an item on the Storage Center is down and not currently operational. when the only alerts that exist are to inform you. Critical. but which does not require immediate attention. or PreProduction. When the System Status icon is red. Some alerts do not have a related object to be shown. The reference number may be important for communication with Dell Technical Support Services.Responding to the Alert Monitor Status Description Emergency Indicates an item on the Storage Center requires immediate attention in order to remain operational. Acknowledged Alerts Alerts in the Alert and Maintenance categories can be acknowledged to indicate to the Storage Center that you have read the alert message and are aware of the problem. After an alert is deleted. Show displays the object. Unavailable Indicates that an item on the Storage Center that is expected to be present cannot currently be found for use. • Properties displays additional information. • To acknowledge an alert. 2 Expand the Alerts folder to view all alerts. The Alert Monitor view appears. Click the Advanced tab in Alert Properties to display a reference number. the Object column is blank. 1 Click System Status at the top of the System Explorer. After all alerts have been acknowledged. • For example. 3 Select an alert to display additional information about the message. Inform Provide information regarding some operation that is occurring or has occurred on the Storage Center. select Acknowledge. The shortcut menu displays additional commands for the alert. View the System Alert Monitor The Alert Monitor opens in a separate tab in the main window. the System Status icon returns to the green (normal) state until additional alerts occur. it cannot be recovered. Alert Deletion Alerts in the Indication and Alert History categories can be deleted. Acknowledging an alert acknowledges it for all users. Dell Compellent 285 . For these alerts. and to finally enter emergency mode if disk space is not added. Storage Center begins a series of steps to conserve space. To support recovery efforts. System Manager responds with the following actions. and should not be used to plan adding disks to the Storage Center. Space Warnings If remaining free disk space reaches 32 GB or less. Emergency Mode Storage Center enters Emergency Mode when the system can no longer operate because there is no more free space. These items are displayed in the Object column. Because of its proximity to the emergency threshold. 286 Storage Center 6. these functions remain available: • Volumes remain visible as read-only. • Expires Replays early. • Prevents new volume creation. When Storage Center enters Conservation Mode. To see more information about one of these objects.Chapter 8 System Management Finding More Information About an Alert Many alerts are associated with items that can be monitored in other areas of the System Manager software. • Generates an Emergency alert. Administrators must take special care to continually monitor free space on the Storage Center and add space when needed to avoid reaching the Emergency Mode threshold. that is. to alert you of the status. select the alert and then select the Show button in the Alert Monitor toolbar. Caution: Because Emergency Mode prevents all server IO outside of existing data updates. it is not a tool to manage storage. Emergency Mode is service affecting. • Volumes can respond to Space Recovery requests from the server or Enterprise Manager to release unused blocks of data.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .2 TB). In Emergency Mode. System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert to inform you that the no new volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays. only re-writes of existing data are allowed. • Restricts write IO to pages already allocated. Conservation Mode Storage Center enters Conservation Mode when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or less for systems smaller than 3. The Conservation Alert is close to the boundary where space is exhausted to keep these actions from being performed unless necessary. Servers Volumes Managed Disk Folder pool of storage An exception to the efficient pool of storage is created when disks are assigned to a second managed disk folder or volumes are created with non-standard datapage sizes or redundancy. Dell Compellent 287 .Monitoring Storage Space Monitoring Storage Space Storage Center sends an alert when additional space is required. and Replays are taken and stored. To take full advantage of Dynamic Capacity. The Storage Center: • Automatically monitors the amount of space used and the amount of space remaining on a Storage Center. Volumes draw space from the common pool. both as a percentage of space and an absolute value • Automatically allocates disk space for volumes to use as needed • Notifies you when remaining free space falls below the Storage Alert Threshold Storage Center groups all disks in a managed Disk Folder into one common pool of storage. assign all disks to one managed disk folder using standard storage type volumes. additional data is stored on volumes. Each volume simultaneously uses all of the disk drives in the shared storage pool for improved data access rates. Space is allocated from the shared storage pool as new volumes are created. select Properties. the Storage Alert Threshold is set at 10% of available storage.) The Disk Folder Properties dialog box appears. you are notified of the possibility that you could run out of space. If available storage space falls below this number. By default. an alert is generated to warn you that space is low. Storage Center allocates disk space from a disk folder for volume and replay use as needed based upon the configurations and IO patterns of each volume. 1 From an assigned disk folder shortcut menu. The notification occurs when space available falls below the Storage Alert Threshold. (Your assigned disk folder may have a different name.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . As the Storage Center approaches the end of the disk space available within the disk folder. This notification indicates that you are in a Space Low state.Chapter 8 System Management Changing the Storage Alert Threshold The Low Space Threshold is the percentage of available storage below which System Manager alerts you to add more disks. 288 Storage Center 6. 2 Select a Storage Alert Threshold from the drop-down menu. ) • Emptying the Recycle Bin Make sure that the Recycle Bin is empty. Make sure that you allow enough time for the System Manager to prepare disks to be used to store data. See Also Delete a Volume on page 38 Managing Disks on page 195 Dell Compellent 289 . and expire Replays from the Replay tab.Adding Space Adding Space The long term solution for increasing available space is to add disks to Storage Center. • Adding Disks The solution to insufficient storage is to add disks or enclosures. Select each volume separately. The list below includes additional actions for recovering unused disk space. the space may not be immediately available. • Using the Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery Program The Enterprise Manager Server Agent Space Recovery program finds and recovers unused disk space. • Expiring Replays Expire Replays that are not needed. Select the Recycle Bin. For more information. (An unused volume is not an empty volume. Space from deleted volumes is not recovered until the Recycle Bin is empty. • Deleting Unused Volumes Delete unused volumes. After disks are added. select Empty Recycle Bin. From the shortcut menu. see the Enterprise Manager User Guide. Field Description Name Name the Storage Center Type Object type Storage Center ID Typically the licensed controller number Management IP Address (IPv4) Used for dual-controller configurations to run the System Manager software. System Properties General Tab Use the General tab to enter the Storage Center name and IP addresses and to set the operation mode.Chapter 8 System Management User Interface Reference for System Properties This section provides a description of the System Properties options. Management IP Prefix (IPv6) Prefix required when using IPv6 address.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . PreProduction See Also Modifying System Properties on page 226 Rename the Storage Center on page 226 Set the System Management IP Address on page 227 290 Storage Center 6. This is set in the controller properties and displayed for information only. This IP address is always connected to the leader. Operation Mode Can be set to Normal. Maintenance. Management IP Address (IPv6) Optional address using IPv6 address. Install. Distributing data across more drives is marginally more efficient. Modifying this setting changes how data is distributed across the drives. but increases vulnerability. RAID 6 Stripe Width 6 Wide (67% Efficient) RAID 6-6 distributes parity blocks across six drives 10 Wide (80% Efficient) RAID 6-10 distributes parity blocks across 10 drives See Also Select RAID Stripe Width on page 228 Dell Compellent 291 . Distributing data across fewer drives is less efficient.User Interface Reference for System Properties System Properties Storage Tab Use the Storage tab to change the stripe width for RAID storage. but marginally decreases vulnerability Field Description RAID 5 Stripe Width 5 Wide (80% Efficient) RAID 5-5 distributes parity blocks across five drives 9 Wide (89% Efficient) RAID 5-9 distributes parity blocks across nine drives. Field Description Everyday at Allows you to set the time of day to run Data Progression Maximum Run Time Set the amount of time for running Data Progression See Also About Data Progression on page 229 Schedule Data Progression on page 229 Determine if Data Progression is Running on page 230 Stop Data Progression on page 230 292 Storage Center 6. click the Help icon at the top of the main pane. To see if your Storage Center includes Data Progression.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Use the Data Progression tab to set the time and duration for Data Progression to run.Chapter 8 System Management System Properties Data Progression Tab Data Progression is a separately licensed application program. if you are planning to upgrade a controller in Storage Center. Current status is given below the selection See Also Set System Cache on page 231 Dell Compellent 293 .User Interface Reference for System Properties System Properties Cache Tab Use the Cache tab to enable or disable read and write cache. Field Description Enable Read Cache Select or clear the check box to enable or disable read cache. For example. you may be instructed to disable Write Cache in order to stop activity to the cache card prior to shutting down the controller. Current status is given below the selection Enable Write Cache Select or clear the check box to enable or disable write cache. Chapter 8 System Management System Properties Disk Sparing Tab Use the Disk Sparing tab to set the spare disk requirements. Field Description Default Number of Spares Per Enclosure Number of disks to be used as hot spares in disk folders. See Also Configure Global Disk Spares on page 232 294 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Minimum Disks Per Enclosure Before Auto Sparing Number of disks to allow before automatically setting up hot spares. User Interface Reference for System Properties System Properties Message Tab Use the Message tab to add a login message such as usage guidelines or user requirements. See Also Add a Login Message on page 233 Dell Compellent 295 . Chapter 8 System Management System Properties Info Tab Use the Info tab to insert notes about the Storage Center. See Also Add Optional Information about Storage Center on page 234 296 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . . 317 Managing User Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Dell Compellent 297 . . . . . . 306 Configuring User Volume Defaults . . . . . 326 User Interface Reference for Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Managing Users . . . . . . . . . User Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Enabling Directory Services Authentication . .9 Users and User Groups This chapter describes how to manage access to Storage Center and configure user volume defaults. . . . Contents Understanding Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Understanding Users. server. All Administrators have the same pre-defined privileges. These users log on to System Manager using their username/password domain credentials. server. server. The User Groups to which a user has access appear in the main pane of the System Explorer. and disk folders made available to them. and commands depending on their privilege level and the User Groups to which they belong. you can configure Storage Center to authenticate directory users. and disk folders • Default values used when a Volume Manager creates a volume For Reporters. 298 Storage Center 6. User Groups restrict access to volume. Access can be granted to individual directory users and directory user groups. views. These users can see only the volume. User Groups. User accounts can be created locally and/ or exist externally in a directory service. • Reporters Reporters have read-only access to the folders associated with their assigned User Groups. • Configure Storage Center to authenticate users in an external directory service In environments that use Active Directory or OpenLDAP. User Groups Volume. • • For Volume Managers. Administrators have access to all folders and do not have an assigned User Group. User Groups can give a Volume Manager or Reporter the impression that they are the only users of the Storage Center. User Privilege Levels Each user is assigned a single privilege level. • Volume Managers Volume Managers have access to the folders associated with their assigned User Groups. volumes. They can create volumes in the allowed volume folders and map them to existing servers in the allowed server folders. and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. and disk folders. Local users are managed in the Users node in the System Tree. Only Administrators can manage Users and User Groups. User Groups restrict: • Access to volume. Storage Center has three levels of user privilege: • Administrator Administrators have read and write access to the entire Storage Center — there are no restrictions on their access. and Authentication Users have access to folders.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . User Account Management and Authentication You can grant access to Storage Center using either of the following methods: • Create local Storage Center users User accounts can be created and maintained using System Manager. server. 299 . users need to be created on each Storage Center. • • If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the Active Directory server(s). Type Advantages Disadvantages Local accounts • Good in environments with few Storage Center Administrators or where few ad-hoc accounts are needed.Understanding Users. If you configure Active Directory. • Leverages existing Active Directory/ OpenLDAP infrastructure. User Groups. • Granting or removing access by user group allows scalability in large environments with many Storage Center Administrators. you must configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP server(s). If you configure password authentication instead of Kerberos. Kerberos ensures encrypted communications with the OpenLDAP server(s). Active Directory and OpenLDAP have different authentication requirements: • To use Active Directory with Storage Center. you must configure Kerberos authentication. Active Directory/ • OpenLDAP • accounts Dell Compellent Allows multiple Storage Centers to point to Active Directory/OpenLDAP so users can log on to each Storage Center. Choosing an Account Management Method The table below briefly compares both account management methods. You cannot simultaneously configure Storage Center to use Active Directory and OpenLDAP. Caution: Dell Compellent recommends enabling at least one local user with Administrator privileges when using directory services. parallel sets of users need to be maintained in Active Directory/OpenLDAP and System Manager. users cannot be authenticated. you must also join the controller to the domain. Allows central management of users. In environments that use Active Directory/OpenLDAP. • Grant directory users and directory user groups access to Storage Center. • To use OpenLDAP with Storage Center. directory users are managed in the Users node in the System Tree. local accounts can be used regardless of your external environment. This account can be used to manage Storage Center in the event that the Active Directory/ OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible and directory users cannot be authenticated. you can either use password authentication or Kerberos authentication. • In environments with multiple Storage Centers. However. users can still be authenticated. Configuration Requirements for External Directory Services Configuring Storage Center to use Active Directory or OpenLDAP authentication is a twopart process: • Enable directory services authentication. • If the Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers are inaccessible. and Authentication Similar to local users. create DNS records for the controller IP address. an SSL certificate is required to communicate with the directory service using SSL/TLS. forward and reverse DNS records for the Storage Center must be created in the domain. 300 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Storage Center must have network connectivity to the directory service. • (Active Directory only) To join the controller to the domain. • You must be familiar with the Active Directory/OpenLDAP configuration of the directory service. If you use Kerberos authentication. The Configure Authentication wizard starts. you must first configure Storage Center to communicate with one or more Active Directory/ OpenLDAP servers. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu. • Storage Center requires credentials from a directory service user that is allowed to query the directory service and who has sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Enabling Directory Services Authentication Before you can grant Storage Center access to directory users and directory user groups. For a dualcontroller Storage Center system. select System→ Access→ Configure Authentication. Prerequisites • An Active Directory or OpenLDAP directory service must be deployed in your environment. For a single-controller Storage Center system. • (OpenLDAP only) To use password authentication with OpenLDAP. • (Active Directory only) Joining the controller to the domain requires credentials from a directory service user who is an administrator and who has sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the directory. you must also configure Storage Center to communicate with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC). create DNS records for the management IP address. Enabling Directory Services Authentication 2 Select the Enable External Directory Services check box. 3 Enter the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of one or more domain controllers separated by spaces. 4 Click Start. 5 From the Directory Type drop-down menu, select the directory service implementation to use: either Active Directory or Open LDAP. 6 Specify Active Directory/OpenLDAP connection information and parameters for your environment. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk (*). Note: You can specify custom LDAP search filters at the command-line interface (CLI) to distinguish a pool of users or user groups from which Storage Center access can be granted. Dell Compellent strongly recommends contacting Dell Technical Support Services for assistance if you want to use custom LDAP search filters. Dell Compellent 301 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Field Description URI* Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for one or more Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers to which Storage Center will connect. Use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the servers. Example URIs for two servers: ldap://server1.example.com ldap://server2.example.com:1234 Note: Adding multiple servers ensures continued authorization of users in the event of a resource outage. If Storage Center cannot establish contact with the first server, Storage Center will attempt to connect to the remaining servers in the order listed. Server Connection Timeout* Maximum time (in seconds) that Storage Center will wait while attempting to connect to an Active Directory/OpenLDAP server. Base DN* LDAP Base Distinguished Name. The Base DN indicates where in the directory to begin searching for users. Relative Base LDAP node where computers are stored. If you configure Active Directory, the Relative Base indicates where the controller should be joined to the domain. Storage Center Hostname* • For a single-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified hostname for the controller IP address. • For a dual-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified hostname for the management IP address. LDAP Domain* LDAP domain to search. Auth Bind Username* Fully qualified username of the user that Storage Center uses to connect to and search the Active Directory/OpenLDAP server. The account must have sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation. Auth Bind Password* Password for the Auth Bind Username. 7 (Optional) Click Test Servers to verify that Storage Center can communicate with the specified Active Directory/OpenLDAP server(s). 8 (Conditional) If you configured OpenLDAP and want to use password authentication, upload certificates to use SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with the OpenLDAP server(s). a Click Upload TLS Cert. b Browse to and select the certificate file for the directory server, in .pem format, and then click Continue. This certificate contains the key information from the directory service. c Browse to and select the CA bundle certificate file, in .pem format, and then click Continue. The CA bundle certificate contains the signer information from the directory service. 9 Click Continue. If you configured Active Directory, Kerberos authentication is required, therefore, the Enable Kerberos option will not display. 302 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Enabling Directory Services Authentication 10 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, or if you configured OpenLDAP and want to use Kerberos, configure Kerberos authentication. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk (*). a If you configured OpenLDAP, select the Enable Kerberos check box. b Specify Kerberos connection information for your environment. Field Description Domain Realms* Kerberos domain realm to authenticate against. In Windows networks, this is the domain name in uppercase characters. KDC Hostname* Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Key Distribution Center (KDC) to which Storage Center will connect. Password Renew Rate (Days) Number of days before the keytab is regenerated. The default value is 0, which equates to a password renew rate of 14 days. 11 Click Continue. Dell Compellent 303 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups 12 (Conditional) If you configured Active Directory, join the controller to the domain to allow Storage Center to communicate with the directory service. Note: To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS records for the Storage Center must be created in the domain. For a single-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a dual-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management IP address. a Click Join. 304 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Enabling Directory Services Authentication b Enter the user name of a directory service administrator in the DS Admin Username field. This account must have sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the directory. c Enter the password for the directory service user in the DS Admin Password field. d Click Join Now. 13 Click Finish Now. See Also Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307 Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308 Dell Compellent 305 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Managing Users To create and delete users, grant access to directory users and directory user groups, or change properties for other users, you must have Administrator privileges. Volume Managers and Reporters can change their own properties but cannot change properties for anyone else. Create a Local User Use the Create User wizard to add local users that can access Storage Center. 1 In the System Tree, right-click the Users icon. 2 From the shortcut menu, select Create User. The Create User wizard starts. 3 Enter a User Name and the Full Name of the user. 4 Select a Privileges level for the user. 5 Select a Session Timeout for the user. 6 Add any optional Notes. 7 Click Continue. 8 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. 9 Click Continue. 10 Enter the user’s contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional. 11 Click Continue. 12 Enter and confirm a password for the user. A password is required. 13 Click Continue. 14 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist, select a User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created, click Create User Group. 306 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Managing Users 15 Click Continue. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. 16 Click Create Now. Grant Access to a Directory User Use the Grant Access to Directory User wizard to grant individual directory users access to Storage Center. Prerequisites Directory services authentication must be enabled. See Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Grant Access to Directory User. The Grant Access to Directory User wizard displays. 2 Enter the fully qualified user name of the directory user in the User Name field. 3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user in the Distinguished Name field. 4 Click Continue. 5 Select a Privileges level for the user. 6 Select a Session Timeout for the user. 7 Add any optional Notes. 8 Click Continue. 9 Enter the user's email information. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. To send a test email, click Send test e-mail next to an address. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. 10 Click Continue. 11 Enter the user’s contact information: Department, Title, Location, Business Phone, Mobile Phone, and Home Phone. These fields are optional. 12 Click Continue. Dell Compellent 307 Then. 2 Enter a display name for the directory user group in the Display Name field. 14 Click Continue.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups 13 (Required only when creating a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist. This is the name that you want to display in System Manager. Note: User properties such as user email information and user contact information are not configured as part of the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard. Members of directory user groups must log on to System Manager once before they display in the Users node in the System Tree. Steps 1 From the Storage Management menu. 308 Storage Center 6. Grant Access to a Directory User Group Use the Grant Access to Directory Group wizard to grant Storage Center access to users who are members of a directory user group. See Enabling Directory Services Authentication on page 300. 15 Click Grant Access. click Create User Group. select a User Group to assign to the user. If a User Group has not been created. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. Prerequisites Directory services authentication must be enabled. The Grant Access to Directory Group wizard displays. the user’s attributes can be configured by modifying the user’s properties. select User→ Grant Access to Directory Group.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 7 (Required only when creating non-Administrator users) If User Groups exist. 6 Click Continue. click Create User Group. select a User Group to assign to the directory user group. This privileges level applies to all members of the directory user group. click Back. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the directory user group. If a User Group has not been created.Managing Users 3 Enter the Distinguished Name of the directory user group in the Distinguished Name field. When finished. Dell Compellent 309 . 9 Click Grant Access. each mapping is displayed on a separate line. 8 Click Continue. 4 Select a Privileges level for the directory user group. Directory user groups with Administrator privileges are not displayed because they do not have an assigned User Group. 5 (Optional) Click Show Mappings to see a list of directory user groups that are currently assigned to local User Groups. If a directory user group is assigned to multiple local User Groups. From the Storage Management menu. This windows allows you to grant.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 310 Storage Center 6. and remove Storage Center access for directory user groups.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups View Directory User Groups The Manage Directory Group Access window displays current directory user groups that have access to Storage Center. modify. select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. such as full name and session timeout. contact information. 2 From the shortcut menu. 5 Click OK. Dell Compellent 311 . or notes. right-click a user name. for the selected user. user view access. 3 Click the General tab. You must have Administrator privileges to view information for another user. 4 Change the full name or session timeout as needed. or upgrade privileges for a Volume Manager or Reporter user. select Properties. Modify General User Properties Use the General tab on the User Properties dialog box to change general properties. Volume Managers and Reporters can view their own properties but cannot view properties for anyone else. 1 In the System Tree.Managing Users Modify User Properties Use the User Properties dialog box to view or modify a user’s general properties. The User Properties dialog box appears. 312 Storage Center 6. 1 In the System Tree. 4 Change any of the fields as needed. 2 From the shortcut menu. such as phone numbers and email addresses.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 5 To send a test email. click Send test e-mail next to an address. for the selected user. The User Properties dialog box appears. 3 Click the Contact tab. right-click a user name. 6 Click OK. SMTP must be configured to send a test email to the user’s email address. select Properties.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Modify User Contact Information Use the Contact tab on the User Properties dialog box to change user contact information. System Manager displays a list of Views to which the user has access. Modify User Notes Use the Info tab on the User Properties dialog box to add notes or view general information about the user. right-click a user name. select Properties. 5 Click OK. The User Properties dialog box appears. System Manager displays the following information: • Date Created: User creation date • Created By: Who created the user • Date Updated: Last date user properties were updated • Updated By: Who updated the user properties 4 Enter Notes. 3 Click the Info tab. Dell Compellent 313 . 2 From the shortcut menu. 4 Select or clear Views to which the user has access. 1 In the System Tree.Managing Users Modify User View Access Use the Tabs tab on the User Properties dialog box to restrict access to the View menu options for the selected user. select Properties. 5 Select the Save tab changes across sessions check box to ensure that the Tabs settings remain after the user logs off. 6 Click OK. 1 In the System Tree. 3 Click the Tabs tab. right-click a user name 2 From the shortcut menu. Downgrade User Privileges To downgrade user privileges. 2 From the shortcut menu. 2 From the shortcut menu. The password is changed. 4 In the Privileges field. You must have Administrator privileges to delete and create users. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 3 In the Privileges field. 6 Click Continue. The User Properties dialog box appears. right-click a user name. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. select Change User Password. 8 Click Close. See Also Delete a User on page 315 Create a Local User on page 306 Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307 Upgrade User Privileges You must have Administrator privileges to upgrade user privileges. 4 Click OK.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 7 Click Modify Access. You must have Administrator privileges to downgrade or upgrade user privileges for directory user groups. you must delete the user and re-create the user with a new name. 1 In the System Tree. select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. select an upgraded privilege level. You cannot recreate a user with downgraded privileges with the same user name. select a new privilege level. 3 Click Modify Group Access. Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group User privileges are modified on a group basis rather than a user basis because all members of the directory user group must have the same privileges. and Administrators can change all passwords. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify user privileges. 4 Click OK. The Change User Password dialog box appears. 1 In the System Tree. 5 Click Continue. 314 Storage Center 6. Note: Passwords for directory users are maintained in Active Directory/OpenLDAP and cannot be changed using System Manager. select Properties.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Change Local User Passwords Users can change their own passwords. right-click a user name. 3 Enter and confirm a password. that user name cannot be reused for a new user. no one will be able to log on to change the restriction. however. right-click a user name.Managing Users Disable a User Users that have been disabled cannot log on to System Manager. 2 From the shortcut menu. reuse the same user name when restoring a user. 4 Click OK. Delete a User You must have Administrator privileges to delete a user. Dell Compellent 315 . Note: If you disable yourself. You must have Administrator privileges to disable a user. select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. 3 Click Remove Group Access. The user is deleted. The User Properties dialog box appears. System Manager asks you to confirm. 2 From the shortcut menu. You can. select Delete. Everyone. 1 From the Storage Management menu. If all users are disabled. select Properties. see Remove Access for a Directory User Group on page 315 1 In the System Tree. 5 Click Close. 1 In the System Tree. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. 4 Click Yes. 3 Click Yes. right-click a user name. Note: Directory user group membership should be maintained in Active Directory/ OpenLDAP and individual members should not be deleted using System Manager. 3 Clear the Enabled check box to disable a user. To remove access for an entire directory user group. will be locked out of System Manager. including you. Note: Once a user is deleted. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to remove Storage Center access. System Manager asks you to confirm. Remove Access for a Directory User Group You must have Administrator privileges to remove Storage Center access for users who are members of a directory user group. you will not be able to log on again. 3 Click Continue. The user is restored and the user name is displayed in the System Tree. 9 Click Restore Now. select User→ Restore Deleted User. 7 (Required only when restoring a non-Administrator user) If User Groups exist. 6 Enter and confirm a password for the user and click Continue. You can only select one user at a time to restore. select a User Group to assign to the user. System Manager displays a summary showing the attributes you entered for the user. 2 From the list of deleted users. If a User Group has not been created. 316 Storage Center 6. You must have Administrator privileges to restore a user.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 8 Click Continue. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 5 Enter the user’s contact information and click Continue. The Restore Deleted User wizard starts.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Restore a User You can restore a previously deleted user. select the user you want to restore. This information is used to contact the user when alerts occur. click Create User Group. 4 Enter the user's email information and click Continue. each command has a different purpose: • My User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges. If you change the volume defaults for another Administrator. if you disable the option to change these defaults and advanced Create Volume options are disabled. Volume Managers can change their own volume default preferences. Dell Compellent 317 .Configuring User Volume Defaults Configuring User Volume Defaults User volume defaults affect all levels of users: Administrator. There are three different user volume default commands. a Volume Manager will not be able to select non-standard options for the volume for which he/she is responsible. New user volume defaults are only for new users. • Volume Managers can only change volume defaults if an Administrator enables Allow User to Modify Preferences. This streamlines the process of creating users. If you create Volume Managers and by default disable their ability to change their user volume defaults. if you disable the option to change Create Volume defaults for a Volume Manager. of course. • Other User Volume Defaults: With Administrator privileges. and Reporter. With Administrator privileges. Though they are similar. • Administrators can always use the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box and change any user volume defaults. that Volume Manager will not be able to change Create Volume defaults. you can select one or more current users and change their user volume defaults. Volume Manager. That Administrator can. • New User Volume Defaults: New user volume defaults apply to users that will be created in the future. they will not be able to change Create Volume defaults. when that user logs on. Defaults are not retroactive. change these defaults. but they can always changes these defaults. you can change your own volume default preferences. Specifically. • Reporters cannot create volumes so volume defaults do not apply. If disabled. Administrative users will be created with new user volume defaults. the defaults you enabled appear as the initial configuration. If enabled. the Volume Manager does not have the option to change volume default preferences. 2 Click the General tab. From the shortcut menu. 3 Select or clear the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box to permit or disallow a user to change his or her defaults. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Select Whether Users Can Change Their Volume Defaults Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to select whether users can change their volume defaults. including their own. All users with Administrator privileges can allow or disallow all other users from modifying preferences. right-click a user name. 318 Storage Center 6. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree. select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. • New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu. 4 Click OK. select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults. select Configure User’s Volume Defaults.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • Select Cache options. If caching is disabled for the Storage Center. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree. you can enable it for an individual volume. select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. right-click a user name. select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults.Configuring User Volume Defaults Set Disk and Cache Volume Defaults Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default disk and cache options. if cache settings are enabled for the Storage Center. 3 Set these defaults: • Select a Disk Folder from which to draw storage. 4 Click OK. you can enable it for a volume but it will not do any good. However. 2 Click the General tab. select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. Select or clear the Allow Changes check box to indicate which caching options are presented to the user when he or she creates a volume. Dell Compellent 319 . Select or clear the Allow Changes check box to indicate whether disk folder options are presented to the user when he or she creates a volume. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu. • New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu. From the shortcut menu. From the shortcut menu. right-click a user name. select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults. select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. 3 Enter a Volume Size (or accept the default). 4 Click OK. • New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Set the Default Volume Size Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default size for new volumes. 2 Click the General tab. 320 Storage Center 6. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree. The default is 500 GB. the names appear as New Volume 1. select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. 3 Enter a Base Volume Name (or accept the default). right-click a user name. System Manager increments this name by one. 4 Click OK. 2 Click the General tab. New Volume 3.Configuring User Volume Defaults Set the Default Volume Name Use the General tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default name for new volumes. New Volume 2. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu. From the shortcut menu. select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults. As you add volumes. • New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu. select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. When you create many volumes at one time. and so forth. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree. Dell Compellent 321 . Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Set Storage Volume Defaults Use the Advanced tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set default data storage options. Caution: Changing advanced user volume defaults can adversely affect Storage Center performance. We strongly recommend you do not change these defaults. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. • New User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Configure New User Volume Defaults. 2 Click the Advanced tab. 3 Set the storage volume defaults. 4 Click OK. See Also Remove a Storage Class on page 209 Preparing a Disk Folder for a Non-Standard Storage Type on page 210 About Storage Profiles on page 212 322 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Configuring User Volume Defaults Set Replay Volume Defaults Use the Replay tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options that determine whether Replays are assigned to new volumes by default, and if so, which Replay profile to assign to the volume. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. 2 Click the Replay tab. 3 From the drop-down menu, select the default Replay schedule behavior: • Never schedule Replays during volume creation • Always prompt for Replay scheduling during volume creation • Always use the Default Replay Profile to schedule Replays for new volumes 4 Select a default Replay Profile. 5 Enter a Minimum Allowed Replay Interval (or accept the default). The default is 5 minutes. This restricts the intervals between Replays and prevents a user from overloading the Storage Center with Replays. 6 Click OK. Dell Compellent 323 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Set Mapping Volume Defaults Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set options that determine the level of mapping displayed to the user and whether to automatically map volumes to a default server. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. 2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is selected. 3 Click the Mapping tab. 4 Set these defaults: • Select or clear the Allow advanced mapping check box. If you allow advanced mapping, select or clear the Show advanced details in mapping displays check box. • Select the Automatically map volumes to default server check box to speed volume creation. If the Automatically map volume to default server check box is selected, select a server to automatically map volumes to. 5 Click OK. See Also Server Mapping on page 107 324 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Configuring User Volume Defaults Set the Default Server Operating System Use the Mapping tab of the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box to set the default server Operating System. 1 Open the Configure User Volume Defaults dialog box for the type of user volume defaults you want to modify: • My User Volume Defaults: From the Storage Management menu, select Volume→ Configure My Volume Defaults. • Other User Volume Defaults: In the System Tree, right-click a user name. From the shortcut menu, select Configure User’s Volume Defaults. 2 On the General tab, make sure the Allow User to Modify Preferences check box is selected. 3 Click the Mapping tab. 4 From the Default Server Operating System drop-down menu, select an Operating System. 5 Click OK. Dell Compellent 325 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Managing User Groups Volume, server, and disk folder access for Volume Managers and Reporters is granted through the User Groups to which the user is assigned. Administrators have access to all folders and do not have an assigned User Group. To manage user groups, you must have Administrator privileges. Create a New User Group Use the Create User Group wizard to create new user groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, click New Group. The Create User Group wizard starts. 3 From the list of volume folders, select a volume folder to be included in the new User Group. Users will have access to volumes in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box. 4 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen. 5 Click Next. 6 From the list of server folders, select a server folder to be included in the new User Group. Users will have access to servers in this folder. If you do not want subfolders to be included, clear the Include Sub Folders check box. 7 (Optional) Click Create a New Folder to create a new folder not listed on this screen. 8 Click Next. 9 From the list of disk folders, select a disk folder to be included in the new User Group. This folder contains the storage to be used for volumes created by this User Group. 10 Click Next. 11 Enter a User Group Name (or accept the default). 12 Click Create Now. You are returned to the original Manage User Groups page. 326 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide Managing User Groups Rename a User Group Use the Update User Group page to change a User Group name. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to rename. 3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears. 4 Click Rename. 5 Enter a New Name for the User Group. 6 Click Rename Now. 7 Click Return. 8 Click Close. Dell Compellent 327 Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Remove a folder from a User Group Removing a folder from a User Group denies access to that folder to users who are assigned to that User Group. Note: A user who has access to more than one User Group may still have access to the folder you removed from a specific User Group. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group from which to remove a folder. 3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server, and disk folders accessible by the User Group. 4 Select a folder or subfolder to remove. 5 Click Remove Folder. System Manager asks you to confirm. 6 If you do not want to remove all subfolders of the selected folder, clear the Remove from sub folders check box. 7 Click Yes. 8 Click Return. 9 Click Close. Add a Folder to a User Group Adding a folder to a User Group gives access to that folder to users who are assigned to that User Group. 1 From the Storage Management menu, select User→ Manage User Groups. 2 In the Manage User Groups page, select the User Group to which to add a folder. 3 Click Modify Group. The Update User Group page appears showing volume, server, and disk folders accessible by the User Group. 4 Click Add Folder. 5 Select one of the following: • Add Volume Folder: System Manager displays a list of volume folders. Select a volume folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders. • Add Server Folder: System Manager displays a list of server folders. Select a server folder to add. Choose whether to include or exclude subfolders. • Add Disk Folder: System Manager displays a list of disk folders. Select a disk folder to add. 6 Click Add Now. 7 Click Return. 8 Click Close. 328 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide The Add User Groups wizard starts. 1 From the Storage Management menu. select the User Group to delete. 1 From the Storage Management menu.Managing User Groups Delete a User Group Use the Manage User Groups page to delete User Groups. System Manager asks you to confirm. select User→ Add User Groups. System Manager asks you to confirm. Add a User Group to a User Adding User Groups to an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user allows the user to access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. 5 Click Continue. 3 Click Continue. Dell Compellent 329 . 4 Select a User Group to add to the user. 2 Click a user name from which to remove a User Group. 6 Click Yes. 4 Select a User Group to remove from the user. 2 Click a user name to which to add a User Group. select User→ Remove User Groups. 4 Click Yes. 2 In the Manage User Groups page. 5 Click Add Now. Remove a User Group From a User Removing User Groups from an existing Volume Manager or Reporter user denies access for the user to the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. select User→ Manage User Groups. 3 Click Delete Group. 3 Click Continue. 5 Click Close. The Remove User Groups wizard starts. 1 From the Storage Management menu. The Manage Directory Group Access window appears. select User→ Manage Directory Group Access. Mapping User Groups to an existing directory user group with Volume Manager or Reporter privileges allows the users to access the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups. 1 From the Storage Management menu. 4 Click Continue. 6 Click Continue. 2 Select the directory user group for which you want to modify User Group associations.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 5 Select a User Group to add to or remove from the directory user group. 330 Storage Center 6. Removing a User Group association from an existing directory user group with Volume Manager or Reporter privileges denies access for the users to the volumes and servers in the folders associated with the selected User Groups.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups Add or Remove a Mapping from a Local User Group to a Directory User Group Adding or removing local User Group associations is performed on a group basis rather than a user basis because all members of the directory user group must be mapped to the same User Groups. 3 Click Modify Group Access. 7 Click Modify Access. 8 Click Close. User Interface Reference for Users User Interface Reference for Users This section provides a description of user interface elements used for user information. General Information About All Users The Users node in the System Tree displays a list of current users and allows you to create and modify users. Privileges Privilege level assigned to the user — Administrator. User Groups User Groups assign to the user. See Also Create a Local User on page 306 Grant Access to a Directory User on page 307 Grant Access to a Directory User Group on page 308 Dell Compellent 331 . Note: Members of directory user groups appear in the Users node only after they log on to System Manager for the first time. Volume Manager. or Reporter. Enabled Indicates whether the user is enabled. Full Name Full name specified for the user. Field Description Name Name of the user. 332 Type Object type — in this case User. Index Unique user ID. Location Location specified for the user. Title Title specified for the user. or Reporter. Enabled Indicates whether the user is enabled. Department Department specified for the user.Chapter 9 Users and User Groups General Information About an Individual User When you select a user name in the System Tree. Session Timeout Time the user can be inactive in System Manager before the user is automatically logged out. Volume Manager. Business Phone Business phone number specified for the user.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . User Groups User Groups assign to the user. Storage Center 6. System Manager displays a summary of the user’s settings. Full Name Full name specified for the user. This number is required by Dell Technical Support Services to assist with component identification. Privileges Privilege level assigned to the user — Administrator. Field Description Name Name of the user. Email Email address specified for the user. Date Created User creation date. Home Phone Home phone number specified for the user. Updated By Who updated the user properties. Date Updated Last date user properties were updated.User Interface Reference for Users Field Description Mobile Phone Mobile phone number specified for the user. Created By Who created the user. Email 2 Email address specified for the user. See Also Modify User Properties on page 311 Downgrade User Privileges on page 314 Upgrade User Privileges on page 314 Modify User Privileges for a Directory User Group on page 314 Dell Compellent 333 . Notes Notes specified for the user. Email 3 Email address specified for the user. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Chapter 9 Users and User Groups 334 Storage Center 6. Settings by HBA Vendor This section includes information for the following HBA types: Dell Compellent • Cisco Fibre Channel Cards • Emulex Fibre Channel Cards • LSI Cards • Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards • Qlogic iSCSI Cards 335 . . . . tip sheets. . . . . . . be aware that choosing a proper queue depth is configuration-dependent. . . . . . This appendix offers some suggested settings. . . . . . . . 335 Settings by Server Operating System . Settings will vary depending on: the applications being run. . . HBA queue depth represents the number of pending storage I/O operations waiting to be executed against the SAN. . . Contents Queue Depth Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A queue depth setting that is too high may result in poor performance while a queue depth setting that is too low may under-utilize storage ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . .A Server HBA Settings This appendix contains summary information about HBA settings. Therefore. . . . . It is also strongly recommended that settings be tested before being put into production mode. . 341 Queue Depth Considerations In SAN environments. . . . . . it is important to properly tune HBA queue depth settings (which may differ from the factory default settings) for your configuration. . . You should. . . . . . . Consult the Dell Compellent Knowledge Center for additional information such as: current technical alerts. . . . . . . the number of ports. . . . . . . . . . it is important to properly configure HBA queue depth to ensure that the storage subsystem runs efficiently. . . . . . . Queue depth settings on HBAs can also be used to throttle servers so that the most critical servers are allowed greater access to the required storage and network bandwidth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and visual demos. however. best practices. . . . white papers. 335 Settings by HBA Vendor . . . . and so forth. To maximize performance. . . . the number of volumes. . . . . . . . . 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .com. you can also use the Emulex HBAnywhere utility to modify HBA configuration settings. Adapter Settings For adapter and advanced settings. configure values as follows Field Setting FCP Error Recovery Disabled (default) Flogi Retries 60 Flogi Timeout 4000 (default) Plogi Retries 60 Plogi Timeout 20000 (default) Port Down Timeout 10000 (default) Port Down IO Retry 60 (default) Link Down Timeout 30000 (default) Emulex Fibre Channel Cards You can configure settings for the Emulex Fibre Channel adapter from the Emulex LightPulse BIOS on system boot by pressing <CTRL> <E> or <ALT> <E> when prompted. Download this utility from: www.emulex. values should be configured as follows: Field Setting NodeTimeOut 60 QueueDepth 254 Note: This is a generally recommended setting.Appendix A Server HBA Settings Cisco Fibre Channel Cards For adapter settings and advanced settings. If you are using Windows. Topology 336 1 Storage Center 6. Your configuration may perform better with a different setting. Settings by HBA Vendor See Also Queue Depth Considerations on page 335 Dell Compellent 337 . go to: Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\ Parameters\Device LSI Cards There are no configurable settings for LSI HBA cards.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Appendix A Server HBA Settings Registry Editor Parameters To view Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor port settings. go to: Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\elxstor\ Parameters\[WWPN of port on card] To view the Registry Editor parameters for Elxstor device settings. 338 Storage Center 6. Settings by HBA Vendor Qlogic Fibre Channel Cards QLA23xx / QLE23xx / QLA24xx / QLE25xx You can configure QLogic Fibre Channel settings from theQLogic BIOS FastUtil on system boot by pressing <CTRL> <Q> when prompted. configure values as follows: Field Setting Connection options 1 for point-to-point only Login retry count 60 attempts Port down retry count 60 attempts Link down timeout 30 seconds Queue depth 256 Note: This is a generally recommended setting. If you are using Windows. you can also use the QLogic SANsurfer utility to modify HBA configuration settings. See Also Queue Depth Considerations on page 335 Dell Compellent 339 . Your configuration may perform better with a different setting.qlogic. For adapter settings and advanced settings. Download this utility from: http://www.com. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . set the ARP Redirect field to Enabled. If prompted for a password. enter config. click the Port Options tab. select the Save Port Settings option. This setting is circled in red below.Appendix A Server HBA Settings Qlogic iSCSI Cards QLA40XX / QLE40xx In addition to the settings recommended for QLogic Fibre Channel adapters. 3 Select an HBA and enable ARP redirect by clicking the check box in the ARP Redirect column. 340 Storage Center 6. 4 Select OK and then Close. the card will reset and the new configuration will be activated and saved. 1 From the QLogic SANsurfer iSCSI HBA Manager. After the password is accepted. 2 Click the Firmware tab. 5 To save settings. Note: If the server is configured in a high-availability cluster. contact Citrix for best practices for setting high-availability timeout values. 1 Open the /opt/xensource/sm/mpathHBA file. HP-UX Version 11.x and Above Use the timeout values given in this section to ensure that the Citrix XenServer fails over properly.31 requires that “Agile Addressing” is enabled for proper failover of Dell Compellent Storage Center controllers. HP-UX Settings HP-UX Version 11. IBM AIX Settings The Compellent MPIO ODM Path Control Module must be installed on the AIX server for proper operation with the Dell Compellent Storage Center.31 HP-UX 11.21 or Earlier No specific setting changes are required. a Cisco fabric with Persistent FCID enabled is required to survive Dell Compellent Storage Center controller failover or port rebalance.Settings by Server Operating System Settings by Server Operating System This section includes information for the following operating systems: • Citrix XenServer Version 5. Dell Compellent Field Setting queue_depth hdisk attribute 32 rw_timeout hdisk 60 341 . 2 Change the settings in the following fields: Field Setting DEFAULT_TIMEOUT 60 MPATH_TIMEOUT 60 3 Save the file and reboot. however.x and Above • HP-UX Settings • IBM AIX Settings • Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings • Novell Netware Settings • Oracle Solaris Settings • Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings • SuSE Linux SLES • VMWare Settings Citrix XenServer Version 5. conf file. However. It is recommended that the latest service pack be installed prior to installing the clustering service.com/b/san/archive/2008/07/27/microsoft-iscsi-software-initiator-isnsserver-timers-quick-reference.aspx Disk Time Out Setting Verify that this value is set to 60 to indicate a 60-second disk timeout threshold. locate: H_Key_Local_Machine\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Disk 2 Reset the value to: TimeoutValue=60 Note: The default value for Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 and later (including Windows Server 2008) is 60 seconds.Appendix A Server HBA Settings Microsoft Windows Server 2000/2003/2008/2012 Settings See the following Microsoft documentation for complete details on changing registry values for the iSCSI initiator: http://blogs.ncf file.conf To the bottom of the fcp.conf Change the following variables to their associated values: 342 Field Setting login-retry-count 60 port-down-retry-count 60 link-down-timeout 30 connection-options 1 Storage Center 6. If this value is set incorrectly. Windows Server 2003 RTM contained a different timeout value than specified. This is a bug in Windows Server 2003 RTM and was corrected in Service Pack 1.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . • /kernel/drv/qlc. • /kernel/drv/fcp. add: fcp_offline_delay=60 Note: This setting change requires a reboot. If clustering was installed before Service Pack 1. then installer will set the TimeoutValue to 20 on the cluster nodes. Oracle Solaris Settings Changes to Solaris settings require a reboot. use the Registry Editor to correct: 1 In regedit. Novell Netware Settings In the nwserver/startup.msdn. add: /LUNS /ALLPATHS /ALLPORTS /PORTDOWN=60 to the end of the Fibre Channel driver load line. Boot Environment 1 To the end of the kernel line in /boot/grub/menu. VMWare Settings No changes are required.d/qla2xxx file.qlport_down_retry=65 # vi /boot/grub/menu. Red Hat Linux RHEL Settings Non-Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe. add: "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65" >> /etc/modprobe.img <kernel version> # reboot 2 Update the init RAM disk.conf file. add: options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=60 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=60" >> /etc/modprobe.conf file.conf file. make the same changes to the /kernel/drv/ qla2300. add: qla2xxx.lst.lst # reboot 2 Reboot the server.Settings by Server Operating System Note: For QLogic drivers.conf # modprobe -r qla2xxx # modprobe qla2xxx 2 Reload the driver. Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe. SuSE Linux SLES Non-Boot Environment 1 To the end of the /etc/modprobe. Dell Compellent 343 .d/qla2xxx # modprobe -r qla2xxx # modprobe qla2xxx 2 Reload the driver.conf # mkinitrd -f -v /boot/initrd-<kernel version>. add: options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65 # echo "options qla2xxx qlport_down_retry=65" >> /etc/modprobe. 3 Reboot the server. Appendix A Server HBA Settings 344 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Ethernet flow control allows a port to send a PAUSE frame to a target port. The PAUSE frame temporarily pauses transmission until the target port is again able to service requests. Ethernet Flow Control Ethernet (or link level) flow control is a mechanism for temporarily stopping data transmission when a NIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B iSCSI Settings This appendix lists recommended and required settings when using iSCSI cards. Switch Ports and Flow Control Ethernet Flow Control should be set to ON for switch ports connected to Storage Center controller card ports. . . . an HBA port. Storage Center and QLogic HBAs automatically enable this feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch port settings for server NICs and other switch ports in the switch network should be set to ON as recommended by the vendor. . 347 Flow Control Settings The following subsections provide recommended flow control settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 . • Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all server interfaces used for iSCSI traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all other interfaces that handle iSCSI traffic. . . Contents Flow Control Settings . . . . 345 Other iSCSI Settings . . . . or a switch port is transmitting data faster than its target port can accept the data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This includes all devices used for replication between two sites. . . . . . . . . Bi-directional Flow Control Dell Compellent recommends the following settings as Best Practice when enabling bidirectional flow control: Dell Compellent • Bi-directional flow control should be enabled for all switch interfaces used by servers or controllers for iSCSI traffic. . . . . . . WAN accelerator. Dell Compellent strongly recommends choosing flow control. devices on both sides (server and SAN) need them enabled. • QLogic 4010 series cards do not support jumbo frames. • All devices connected through iSCSI must support 9K jumbo frames. be aware of the following: • Make sure that all servers.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . This simplifies troubleshooting initial deployments. the Storage Center will not understand the servers’ packets. then do NOT turn on this feature. if you use jumbo frames. If servers have jumbo frames enabled first. and any other network device that handles iSCSI traffic must support 9K jumbo frames. If you are not sure that every device in your iSCSI network supports 9K jumbo frames. If Storage Center has jumbo frames enabled first. However. 346 Storage Center 6. but cannot support both at the same time. and storage are fully operational before enabling jumbo frames. router. This means every switch. The general tab displays the model number in the description. • When jumbo frames are enabled. If you must choose between the two features. To display the model number of a card using the Storage Center System Manager GUI as follows: a Expand the System Tree as follows: Controller→controller serial number→IO cards→iSCSI b Highlight the port. It is recommended that any change to the jumbo frames enabled/disabled setting is done during a maintenance window. • All devices used to connect iSCSI devices must support 9K jumbo frames.Appendix B iSCSI Settings Jumbo Frames and Flow Control Some switches have limited buffer sizes and can support either jumbo frames or flow control. the servers will not understand the Storage Center’s packets. switches. • When deciding which switches to use. This fragmentation may result in: iSCSI replication failure and/or suboptimal performance.x Storage Center firmware. • Ensure that any switches used for iSCSI are of a non-blocking design.Other iSCSI Settings Other iSCSI Settings The following settings are Dell Compellent recommended best practices. • Disable unicast storm control on every switch that handles iSCSI traffic. • Maintain two separate and dedicated VLANs when using multipathed iSCSI. Use only quality. Setting iSCSI Best Practice Full Duplex • Use auto-negotiate for all interfaces that will correctly negotiate at fullduplex and at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or 10GbE). • Disable multicast at the switch level for all iSCSI VLANs. The VLANs should remain isolated only to links designated to carry iSCSI traffic. The default is 1500 but sometimes WAN circuits or VPNs create additional overhead that can cause packet fragmentation. enterprise-class networking equipment. • If a switch cannot correctly auto-negotiate at full-duplex or at the maximum speed of the connection. • Maintain separate and dedicated iSCSI VLANs. Switch • VLAN Dell Compellent Configure switch interfaces that directly connect to servers or controllers as forwarding only for Spanning Tree (STP). • If you will not perform iSCSI replication between systems or sites. MTU Verify the optimal MTU setting for replications. remember you are running SCSI traffic over the switch. 347 . It is not recommended to use SBHO (small business/home office) class equipment outside of lab/test environments. • Be aware that inter-switch links (ISLs) that forward iSCSI traffic may cause communication issues due to switch-port oversubscription. managed. it should be hard set at full-duplex and at the maximum speed of the connected port (1GbE or 10GbE). disable routing between regular network and iSCSI VLANs. Adjust the MTU setting using the GUI in 6. Set multicast storm control to enabled (if available) when multicast can not be disabled. Appendix B iSCSI Settings 348 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . .C UPS User FAQ and Configuration This appendix provides a FAQ for using Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) and describes configuration for two types of UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Configuring a Liebert™ UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents UPS User FAQ . . . 350 Configuring an APC™ UPS . . . . . . 356 Dell Compellent 349 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You must provide the IP address of the Storage Center to the UPS. How does the Storage Center know which UPS should talk to it? 1 In System Explorer System Tree. 350 Storage Center 6. The Create UPS wizard opens. • On dual-controller configurations. What communications protocol does the APC UPS use? APC UPS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). 3 Enter the IP Address of the UPS you want the Storage Center to use. use the management IP address. • On single controller configurations. Can any brand of UPS be used with the Storage Center? Storage Center supports all APC™ UPS systems that use the AP9630 network management card. How does the UPS send messages? If the UPS is on the same subnet as the Storage Center. Do I need to configure the UPS? How do I do this? Yes you must configure the UPS. 6 Click Create Now. For dual-controller systems. it unicasts UDP packets.Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration UPS User FAQ When setting up a UPS. the management IP is used for traps. it broadcasts UDP packets. On dual-controller configurations. right-click the UPS icon. Choices are Liebert or APC. If the UPS is on a different subnet(s). configure the UPS to point to the management IP address. 5 Select the UPS Type from the drop-down menu. This is the same IP address as is used for the Storage Center System Manager. 2 Click Create New UPS from the pop-up menu. 4 Enter the SNMP Community String. This tells the Storage Center to accept messages from the specified UPS. configure the UPS to point to the Eth0 address. The Community String acts as a password and is included in every packet transmitted between the SNMP manager and the SNMP agent.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . you must configure the UPS to “point” to the Storage Center. Configure the UPS either through APC™ PowerChute or through the local serial port. This is the time during which the UPS cannot deliver the voltage and/or current to meet load requirements. all IO traffic to the Storage Center ceases. What happens to IO when the battery runs out? The following happens to IO when the battery runs out: • Because it is down. The OS then notifies the application. 351 . the UPS shuts off. the software triggers the OS to gracefully shut down the server. • The Storage Center then it waits for an Off Battery message or it rides the UPS until it shuts down. When a packet is received saying the battery has two minutes (can be configured to other amounts of time) of life left.UPS User FAQ What information is provided in a UPS message? A UPS message provides messages such as: • On Battery • Off Battery • Time to Live • Any other information displayed in the UPS GUI What happens within Storage Center when the UPS says it is On Battery? The following happens within Storage Center when an On Battery message is received: • The Storage Center turns off write cache and flushes it to disk. What happens to servers when the battery runs out? The following happens to servers when the battery runs out: Dell Compellent • APC™ offers PowerChute Business Edition software for free that is installed in the server. • When then server is shut down. This software monitors UPS state information packets. thus allowing it to simply ride the UPS until it shuts down. • When the UPS’s Time to Live expires. no in-flight IO requests can be acknowledged by the Storage Center. • The driver in the OS exhausts retries or times out and issues an error to the OS that the disk is gone. 352 Storage Center 6. The Administration pane appears. enter the IP address of the UPS. The UPS Network Management main window appears. assigned or derived from DHCP. 2 From the main window. The Network pane appears.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 3 Click Network.Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration Configuring an APC™ UPS You can configure up to four access control entries to specify which Network Management Systems (NMS) have access to this UPS. 1 In a new browser window. click the Administration tab. 6 For a single-controller Storage Center. The Access Control pane appears. The Access Control Entry pane appears. 5 Select Public. select SNMPv1 →Access Control. 9 Add the actual IP address of the clustered controller (not the management IP address). in the Access Control Entry pane. 8 Click Apply. Dell Compellent 353 . 7 As an Access Type. select Read. enter the controller IP address in the Access Control Entry pane.Configuring an APC™ UPS 4 In the TCP/IP menu on the left side. The Notification pane appears. select trap receivers. 354 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . 11 In the Notification window. The Trap Receivers pane appears.Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration 10 Select Notification. enter the following: • For a single-controller Storage Center. unmark the check box.Configuring an APC™ UPS 12 Click Add Trap Receiver. Dell Compellent 355 . The default. leaves the trap receiver undefined. enter the controller IP address. 13 Enable trap generation for this trap receiver. 15 In the SNMPv1 field. Storage Center receives authentication traps (traps generated by invalid attempts to log on to this device). 0. • For a dual-controller Storage Center system. To disable that ability.0.0.0. enter the IP address of the Management controller. 16 When Authenticate Traps is enabled. 14 In the NMS IP/Host name field. 17 Click Apply. enter Public (the default). The Trap Receiver pane appears. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . If you delete a trap receiver. select Management Protocol→SNMP→Access. all notification settings configured under Event Actions for the deleted trap receiver are set to their default values. The Configuration Categories window appears. The Access pane appears. assigned or derived from DHCP. 3 From the tree on the left side. The Monitor pane appears. enter the IP address. 356 Storage Center 6. 2 Click the Configure tab. Enter your user name and password. Configuring a Liebert™ UPS 1 In a new browser window.Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration Modify or Delete a Trap Receiver To modify or delete a trap receiver. click its IP address or host name to access its settings. 4 The system may ask for a user name and password. 8 For Community name enter Public. The Traps pane appears. 9 Click Save. Do not enter the Management IP of the Storage Center but the true ETH0 IP of each Controller. enter the controller IP address on the first unused line. 6 In the Network Name column. Dell Compellent 357 . 10 From the tree on the left side. enter the IP address of each controller on the first two unused lines.Configuring a Liebert™ UPS 5 Click Edit. • For a dual-controller Storage Center system. enter the following: • For a single-controller Storage Center system. 7 Select Read access. select Management Protocol→SNMP→Traps. 13 In the Community column. 15 Click Save.Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration 11 Click Edit. 14 Select or clear Heartbeat. 12 In the Network Name column. enter the controller IP address on the first unused line. enter Public.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . enter Management IP address (not the ETH0 address). enter the following: • For a single-controller Storage Center system. • For a dual-controller Storage Center system. 358 Storage Center 6. The UPS is added to the Storage Center configuration. click Reinitialize. 2 To save changes.Configuring a Liebert™ UPS Reinitialize the UPS 1 In the menu tree on the left side. Dell Compellent 359 . click Reinitialize.The Reinitialize pane appears. Appendix C UPS User FAQ and Configuration 360 Storage Center 6.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . VAAI support is included in ESXi and the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is not required. . . . Note: For ESXi 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin This appendix describes the Dell Compellent VAAI (vStorage API for Array Integration) Plugin and how to install it on VMware ESX/ESXi 4. Contents Introduction . . . 362 Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. . .0 and later. . . . . 364 Dell Compellent 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . . . 362 Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .5. initializing file systems.5 – 5.1 on page 364. and copying or moving data directly to back-end storage.vib update 362 Storage Center 6. The offloaded storage operations are: • Block zeroing: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to zero out a large number of blocks to speed up provisioning of virtual machines on ESX/ESXi hosts. VAAI both conserves storage fabric bandwidth and reduces resources used on ESX/ESXi hosts. remove these claim rules by referring to Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1. By offloading these tasks.1 Follow these steps to install the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin. the following table displays offload operations supported by Dell Compellent. Storage Center Version Supported Offload Operations 4. In general. 3 Use the SCP (Secure Copy) utility to copy the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin file (vmware-esx-dell-vaaip_compellent. 1 List the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI If claim rules exist that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches column. Listed by Storage Center version.vib) to the ESX/ESXi host.2 and later Block zeroing 6. For ESX/ESXi 4. see KB Article: 1918 on the VMware Knowledge Base (http://kb. • Hardware-assisted locking: Provides an alternative means to protect the metadata for VMFS cluster-file systems.1 None 5.vmware. thereby improving the scalability of multiple ESX/ESXi hosts sharing a Dell Compellent Storage Center datastore. the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin must be installed on each ESX/ESXi host in a datacenter to offload storage operations to a Dell Compellent Storage Center.0 and later Block zeroing Full copy Hardware-assisted locking Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. VAAI improves data transfer performance and is transparent to the user. 2 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode.com/). Note: For information on using the SCP utility to copy files to and from an ESX/ESXi host.5.Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin Introduction VAAI is an API for storage partners that allows ESX/ESXi hosts to offload operations that involve file locking. • Full copy: Enables Dell Compellent Storage Centers to make full copies of data within the array without having the ESX/ESXi host read and write the data. 4 Install the plugin on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following command: esxupdate -b vmware-esx-dell_vaaip_compellent. execute the following command and verify that DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT is listed in the VAAI Plugin Name field for one or more devices: esxcli vaai device list Example of command output: naa. The hardware acceleration statuses for the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin are: Dell Compellent • Unknown: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the back-end storage is Storage Center 5. in the command output. 363 .1 5 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host. execute the following command: esxcli corestorage device list The VAAI Status field. displays the hardware acceleration status of a storage device. which have COMPELNT listed as the vendor. The Attached Filters field displays the name of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device.The Attached Filters field displays the name of the VAAI filter attached to the storage device. were successfully added by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI Example of command output: Rule Class Filter Filter Rule Class Type Plugin 5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER 5001 file vendor VAAI_FILTER Matches vendor=COMPELNT model=* vendor=COMPELNT model=* Rule Class Rule Class Type Plugin Matches VAAI 5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* VAAI 5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* 8 To verify that the installation of the plugin was successful.Installing the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.6000d3100001db000000000000000094 Device Display Name: Volume1 VAAI Plugin Name: DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT 9 To verify the hardware acceleration status of storage devices. • Unsupported: Hardware acceleration is not enabled for the storage device. • Supported: Hardware acceleration is enabled for the storage device and the back-end storage is Storage Center 6. 6 Define hardware acceleration claim rules for the plugin by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=Filter --plugin=VAAI_FILTER --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign esxcli corestorage claimrule add --claimrule-class=VAAI --plugin= DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT --type=vendor --vendor=COMPELNT --autoassign esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule load --claimrule-class=VAAI esxcli corestorage claimrule run --claimrule-class=Filter 7 Verify that the new claim rules. using the bulletin ID found in Step 2: # esxupdate remove -b cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.6000d3100001db000000000000000094 Vendor: COMPELNT Model: Compellent Vol Revision: 0505 SCSI Level: 5 Is Pseudo: false Status: on Is RDM Capable: true Is Local: false Is Removable: false Attached Filters: VAAI_FILTER VAAI Status: unknown Other UIDs: vml.1-300727 --maintenancemode 4 Display the hardware acceleration claim rules on the ESX/ESXi host by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule list --claimrule-class=VAAI Example of command output: Rule Class Filter Filter Rule Class Type Plugin 5001 runtime vendor VAAI_FILTER 5001 file vendor VAAI_FILTER Matches vendor=COMPELNT model=* vendor=COMPELNT model=* Rule Class Rule Class Type Plugin Matches VAAI 5001 runtime vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* VAAI 5001 file vendor DELL_VAAIP_COMPELLENT vendor=COMPELNT model=* 364 Storage Center 6.Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin Example of command output: naa.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .6000d3100001db0000000000094 Display Name: Volume1 Size: 20480 Device Type: Direct-Access Multipath Plugin: NMP Devfs Path: /vmfs/devices/disks/naa.1 Follow these steps to uninstall the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin. 1 Use vMotion to move all of the virtual machines off the ESX/ESXi host or shut down all of the virtual machines and put the host into maintenance mode.02001200006000d3100001db00000000000000013b436f6d706 Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4. 3 Remove the plugin by executing the following command: esxupdate remove -b bulletin-id --maintenancemode Example of command.1-300727. the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin is cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.1-300727 installed 2011-10-25T14:36:17. 2 Find the bulletin ID of the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin by executing the following command from the vSphere CLI and looking for the text cross_dell-vaaip-compellent: esxupdate --vib-view query Example of command output: cross_dell-vaaip-compellent_410.590977+00:00 In the example above. Example of commands: # esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=Filter # esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r 5001 --claimrule-class=VAAI 6 Reboot the ESX/ESXi host to complete the uninstallation.Uninstalling the Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin on ESX/ESXi 4.1 5 Remove the claim rules that have COMPELNT listed as the vendor in the Matches column by executing the following commands: esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID --claimrule-class=Filter esxcli corestorage claimrule delete -r claimrule_ID --claimrule-class=VAAI where. Dell Compellent 365 . claimrule_ID is the number in the Rule column of the command output shown in Step 4. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Appendix D Dell Compellent VAAI Plugin 366 Storage Center 6. E Port Usage This appendix describes port usage for communicating through the network to Dell Compellent products in Storage Center. set up a firewall to allow outbound communication from both controller ETH 0 IP addresses and also from the shared management IP address. 367 . * Dell Compellent Port Protocol Name Type Usage Purpose 22 Secure Console (SSH*) TCP Outbound SSH secure communication between Storage Center and Support Center Secure SSH Servers 25 SMTP TCP Outbound Sending email notifications 69 TFTP UDP Inbound Configuration and boot files 88 Kerberos TCP Outbound Secure communication 80/8080 HTTP TCP Inbound/Outbound Automatic redirect to secure ports 123 NTP UDP Inbound/Outbound Network time protocol 161 SNMP UDP Inbound Communication from network manager 162 SNMP Trap UDP Inbound/Outbound Sending alerts 389 LDAP TCP Outbound Directory access 443/8443 HTTPS TCP Inbound/Outbound • Communicating with Storage Center applications • Phone Home* 514 Syslog UDP Outbound Forwarding Storage Center logs to syslog servers 636 LDAPS TCP Outbound Using LDAP over SSL 3033 HTTPS TCP Inbound/Outbound Compellent API 3205 iSNS TCP Outbound Communication with network servers 3260/ Dynamic iSCSI Cards TCP Inbound/Outbound iSCSI Initiator (server or replication source) 5000-5010 Compellent IPC UDP Inbound/Outbound IPC traffic for communicating with Storage Center components For SSH and Phone Home. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Appendix E Port Usage 368 Storage Center 6. new writes to that site can be accepted without having to wait for the secondary (remote) storage site to also finish its writes. B Back End The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that receive data writes. In the event of problems (such as disk drive failures. C CHA See Compellent Host Adapter. or virus infection) resulting in data loss or damage to the original data.Glossary A Assigned Disks Same as Managed Disks. See also Replication. Assigned disks use metadata to track information about volumes on the disk and other assigned disks managed by the controller. A Replay is first copied to a non-volatile disk remote system. Bandwidth The amount of data that can be sent to or from Storage Center. disk drives in enclosures are the back end of the controller. but if the primary site failed before the data was written to the secondary site the data that had not yet been written could be lost. Asynchronous Replication After data has been written to the primary storage site. the Replay is retrieved and restored to a View Volume. Dell Compellent 369 . See also Target System. power outages. Physical disks that are identified by Storage Center and to which data can be written. Asynchronous Replication does not have the latency impact that synchronous Replication does. In general. Backup A two step process. serviceability and performance (using load balancing). Storage Center provides configurable cache to minimize disk latencies.Glossary CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is an option for authentication of iSCSI communications. Storage Center provides automatic controller failover in an active-active configuration. the authenticator sends a challenge message to the peer. The Control Port redirects a connection to the appropriate virtual port. and the controller 2 cache card holds the mirror for controller 1. System Manager generates a Conservation Mode Alert to inform you that no new volumes can be created and that it will begin to aggressively expire Replays.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Cache A high speed memory or storage device used to reduce the effective time required to read data from or write data to a lower speed memory or device. I/O routing. The authenticator checks the response against its own calculation of the expected hash value. Provides the intelligence for the entire Storage Center subsystem. Compellent Host Adapter (CHA) Internal cache card/battery seated in each Storage Center controller. Controller Provides disk aggregation (RAID). Clustered Controllers More than one Storage Center controller that is interconnected (typically at high-speeds) for the purpose of improving reliability. On a single-controller Storage Center. Every Storage Center contains at least one. Conservation Mode Mode reached when remaining free space reaches 32 GB (or less for configurations smaller than 3. The peer responds with a value calculated using a one-way hash function. Cluster Node Server that is a member of a server cluster. a Control Port is created for each iSCSI fault domain. Copy-Mirror-Migrate Storage Center feature allowing volumes to be migrated between different disk types and RAID levels. battery backup cache provides automatic restart and volumes migrate between controllers in the event of controller failure. iSCSI Servers connect to the Storage Center using the Control Port. After the Link Establishment phase is complete.2 TB). and data recovery. On a cluster-controller Storage Center. Fully mirrored. CHAP periodically verifies the identity of a peer using a 3-way handshake. initially when the link is established. 370 Storage Center 6. the controller 1 cache card holds the mirror for controller 2. error detection. the connection is terminated. If the values match. if values do not match. Control Port In virtual port mode. availability. the authentication is acknowledged. the cache card holds the mirror for the single controller. Write cache memory is mirrored to the cache card. When Storage Center enters conservation mode. Captures a point in time copy. Folders may be associated with multiple pagepools. Only data that has changed from the previous point in time copy is stored. based on data access requirements. Storage Center disaster recovery includesData Instant replay and Remote Instant Replay. Dual Redundancy See Redundancy. based on the Replay Profile. For example. Dell Compellent 371 . Disk Position The position of the disk in the enclosure. This provides the ability to roll back a volume to a previous point in time. whether due to natural disaster or malicious intent. Enables backup and recovery of volumes without impacting resources. Volumes draw storage from disk folders. Data Instant Replay Ensures high system and application availability. Deduplication Deduplication copies only the changed portions of a Replay. The second number is column number from the left of the enclosure. Data Progression Automatically migrates data to the right class of storage based on assigned or recommended policies. Dynamic Capacity Mandatory application program that enables an administrator to allocate space only when data is physically written to the volume. Disk 01-02 is in the first (top row) and second column from the left. Disk Folders A collection of physical disks that can be assigned attributes by the user.D DNS (Domain Name Service) Name of the TCP/IP stack that converts domain names into IP addresses. An example of a disk position is 01-01. rather than all data captured in each Replay. Performance is improved by maximizing the number of disk drives in a folder. from the top of the enclosure. Allows businesses to optimize utilization of storage resources through migration to the appropriate class of storage devices. Dynamic capacity reduces storage expenditures by consuming physical disk space only when data is written to a volume. Disaster Recovery The ability to recover from the loss of a complete site. Dynamic Controllers A minimum of two Storage Center clustered controllers that provide automatic failover by using an internal heartbeat. to higher or to lower performance devices. The first number is the row number. and a single interface to the controller. and cabling. Fibre Channel A high-speed interconnect used to connect servers to Storage Center controllers and back-end disk enclosures. a Storage Center that is replicating data to a remote system is the front end of the remote system. See also Back End. Ethernet A protocol that defines a common set of rules and signals for networks. an alarm system. Storage Center uses Eth0 to support log on. FluidFS The Dell Fluid File System (FluidFS) is a scalable NAS with up to eight controllers in a cluster. 372 Storage Center 6. and to send email. F Fabric A combination of interconnected switches that act as a unified routing infrastructure.Glossary E Emergency Mode Mode reached when the Storage Cener can no longer operate because there is no more free space. alerts. Front End The component in the Storage Center SAN flow of data writes (server to switch to controller to disks) that initiates data writes. cooling fans. In general. Eth0 Ethernet port 0. Enclosure The box that holds the disks.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Replication. FC components include HBAs. SNMP traps. all front-end ports can be part of the one fault domain. fully duplexed serial communication protocol permitting data transfer rates of up to 10 Gigabit per second. each primary and reserved port creates one fault domain. Eth1 Storage Center uses Eth1 for dedicated InterProcess Communication between controllers in a multicontroller configuration. and Phone Home data. FastTrack An optional Storage Center utility that dynamically places the most active data on the outer (faster) disk tracks. hubs. It allows multiple connections among devices on a SAN and lets new devices enter unobtrusively. However. servers (or switches) are the front end of the controller. In virtual port mode. switches. access the GUI. A FC (or iSCSI) topology with at least one switch present on the network. The term FC also refers to a highspeed. Provides disk status. In Legacy Mode. temperature sensors. Fault Domain A fault domain identifies a failover set. or moving data into a computer system's memory. such as FC. A Storage Center Hot Spares can have a different capacity than the data drive it replaces. without the need for a specialized network infrastructure. The process of moving data between a computer system's main memory and an external device or interface such as a storage device. In the event that an active array fails. iSCSI iSCSI (Internet SCSI) is the specification that defines the encapsulation of SCSI packets over ethernet using the TCP/IP transport protocol. In contrast. or a protocol that enables transport of block data over IP networks. IO Input/output. A system with 99. and writing. Hot Spare A Hot Spare disk is a backup disk. so that the array is again protected with a new Hot Spare. or moving data from a computer system's memory to another location. Although the Hot Spare becomes an active disk without human intervention.G GUI Graphical User Interface.999% availability experiences only about five minutes of downtime. IO is a collective term for reading. I Initiator A source Storage Center that initiates Replication. HBA (Host Bus Adapter) The HBA is the intelligent hardware residing on the host server that controls the transfer of data between the host and the Storage Center. or network connected to other computer systems. remember to replace the failed drive as soon as possible. a high availability system is defined as having 99.9% uptime. printer. the controller makes the Hot Spare part of the active array and rebuilds data on the fly. Dell Compellent 373 . Hot spares can span multiple disk enclosures. display. Data is copied from an initiator to a Target System. HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. H High Availability A continuously available system is characterized as having essentially no downtime in any given year. which translates into a few hours of planned or unplanned downtime each year. the controllers share read/write duties. the volume will appear to the server as a single. Either the lead or peer controller can become a mentoring controller. so. Management IP Address Address used to connect to Storage Center. fault domains associate Primary and Reserved front-end ports to each other as opposed to Virtual Mode where all front-end ports can be part of the same fault domain. load balancing maintain high performance IO. It is a number that acts like a name for a particular network adapter. In the event the peer controller fails. for example. the network cards (or built-in network adapters) in two different computers will have different names. across which data is striped and from which volumes are created.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . thus doubling IOs. Each logical unit has an address. or MAC addresses. Managed Disks Disks that are grouped together to form a discrete bundle. Manual Replay Storage Center feature that allows the user to manually create point-in-time copies of volumes. the leader controller is the primary controller. Under ordinary circumstances. LUN A logical unit is a conceptual division (a subunit) of a storage disk or a set of disks.Glossary L Lead Controller In a dual-controller configuration. the mentoring controller copies configuration information to the new or added controller. M MAC Address In computer networking a Media Access Control address (MAC address) is a quasi-unique identifier attached to most network adapters (NICs). local disk drive of the specified size. the lead controller assumes the duties of both controllers. Load Balancing Referring to the ability to redistribute load (read/write requests) to an alternate path between server and storage device. known as the logical unit number (LUN). Mapping (Volume to Server) Mapping defines which servers can access specific volumes. Mentoring Controller During installation or after replacing or adding a controller. in Legacy Mode. which allows it to be uniquely identified. 374 Storage Center 6. See also Peer Controller. Each controller has its own IP address. Legacy Mode Non-virtual port mode. It is possible to change the MAC address. but the management IP address remains constant. After this linkage is established. P Pagepool A pool of storage. In the event the lead controller fails. and the software that enables multipathing. These components include cabling. Pagepool Alert The first alert generated when the pagepool space consumed by volumes and Replays exceeds the configurable pagepool alert threshold. Not allowed for volumes already having Replays. thus doubling IO. variable-latency data networks. ports are given an iSCSI name. on iSCSI networks. Port The physical connection point on servers. Dell Compellent 375 . N NPIV Mode N_Port ID Virtualization is a prerequisite for enabling FC virtual ports.Multipathing Redundant storage components that transfer data between server and storage. adapters. If a switch does not accept NPIV. NTP The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems over packet-switched. Peer Controller The peer controller is the equal of the Lead controller. Q QoS Definition Quality of Service. and disk drive enclosures that is used to connect to other devices. A networking term that specifies a guaranteed throughput level to guarantee end-to end latency will not exceed a specified level. the peer controller assumes the duties of both controllers. both controllers share read/write duties. Storage Center controller. and there is no more free disk space available for the pagepool to consume. switches. switches. FC ports cannot be converted to Virtual Ports and NPIV is turned off. Ports on a FC network are identified by their Worldwide Port Name (WWPN). In a dual-controller configuration. Preallocation Pre-allocating storage physically assigns storage to the volume before its use by the server. Remote System A Storage Center that sends or receives Replication data. RAID 10-DM RAID 10 Dual Mirror provides maximum protection for storage. Remote Instant Replay Remote Instant Replay is a Replay written to a remote backup site. Do not use RAID 0 unless data is backed up elsewhere. a secondary resource can take over its function. with bidirectional remote copies that can either have matched or split intervals. RAID 10 provides optimum Read / Write performance. RAID 5-5 is 80% efficient. RAID 5-5 and 5-9 Maintains a logical copy of the data using a mathematically derived rotating parity stripe across 5 or 9 disks. Dual Redundancy protects against data lost if any two disks fail. RAID 0 Stripes data but provides no redundancy. Provides both data availability and top performance. Also knows as Replication. RAID 6-6 is 67% efficient. The sites can be active-active. Example schemes include mirroring and RAID-5.Glossary R RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) A way of encoding data over multiple physical disks to ensure that if a hard disk fails a redundant copy of the data can be accessed instead. and the fastest restoration of data. Data is written simultaneously to three separate disks. Storage Center provides redundancy for each component so that there is no single point of failure.RAID 5 protects against data loss when any single disk fails. This method has less overhead for the redundant information than RAID 10. RAID 10 Striped and mirrored. The parity stripe is derived from the data stripes. increased probability of withstanding multiple failures. All three disks return a write acknowledgement. Maintains a minimum of one full copy of all data on the volume. RAID 5-9 is 89% efficient. 376 Storage Center 6. Remote System A Storage Center that is receiving Replication data. If one disk fails. RAID 10 protects against data loss when any 2 disks fail. however write performance is slower than RAID 10 due to the calculation of the parity stripe for every write.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . Single Redundancy protects against loss of data if any one disk fails. Redundancy The duplication of information or hardware equipment components to ensure that if a primary resource fails. RAID 6-6 and 6-10 RAID 6 protects against data loss when any 2 disks fail. all data is lost. RAID 6-10 is 80% efficient. SNMP can be used to collect information about network statistics from these devices and to relay this information to a central management console to monitor network health. Storage Center™ A complete storage solution that provides unified physical storage and storage management. The SAN is made up of specific devices. and generate reports.Replay A fully usable copy of a defined collection of data that contains an image of the data as it appeared at the point in time at which the copy was initiated. S SAN (Storage Area Network) A storage area network (SAN) is a specialized network that provides access to high performance and highly available storage subsystems using block storage protocols. perform diagnostics. switches that help route storage traffic. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) defines a message format and forwarding procedure to enable messages to be sent between hosts on the Internet. Dell Compellent 377 . SBOD Switched Bunch of Disks. Compare with NAS. Replay Profile Set of rules for taking Replays that is applied to all volumes using that profile. such as host bus adapters (HBAs) in the host servers. The Replication process can be synchronous or asynchronous. duplicates are known as Replays. switches. trap errors. hubs. and disk storage subsystems. Server Servers define connectivity to the Storage Center. The main characteristic of a SAN is that the storage subsystems are generally available to multiple hosts at the same time. Snapshot See Replay. Replication Replication is the process of duplicating data from one highly available site to another. They allow you to associate your server name to the hardware connectivity presented by the server for easy identification. which makes them scalable and flexible. SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard Layer-7 (application layer) protocol for collecting information from and configuring network devices such as servers. Storage Center Architecture integrates multiple disk technologies with multiple interfaces and controllers. and routers on an Internet Protocol (IP) network. SCSI SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) is a collection of ANSI standards that define IO buses primarily intended for connecting storage devices to servers. If RAID levels or tiers in a Storage Profile change. the Replication process can take a long time and slows down the writing of data. composed of slower. Storage space is only used when data is written. See Initiator. All volumes are attached to a Storage Profile. Transport Type The protocol used to communicate data between the Storage Center and attached servers. Storage Center is most efficient when all disks are combined into one pool of storage. The advantage of this approach is that the two sets of data are always synchronized. to each volume. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide . The disadvantage is that if the distance between the two storage disks is substantial. cheaper. you can create additional based on redundancy and data page size. See also asynchronous Replication. each write to the primary disk and the secondary (remote) disk must be complete before the next write can begin. Tiers Blocks of data that are stored according to its intended use. Fully mirrored. Storage Pool An undifferentiated pool of available disk space from which Storage Center creates volumes.Glossary Storage Clustering Storage Center software providing automatic controller failover through multiple controllers in an activeactive configuration. battery backup cache provides automatic restart in the event of a controller failure. composed of the fastest disks. Storage Type Pool of storage from which volumes are created. increase availability and achieve greater performance. data in volumes attached to that Storage Profile is moved by Data Progression to the new RAID levels or tiers. larger disks. In some circumstances. Thin Provisioning allows organizations to reduce their overall disk expenditures. Synchronous Replication In synchronous Replication. T Target System The Storage Center that receives Replication data from an initiating Storage Center. Thin Provisioning Volume sizes can be defined that are greater than the actual physical storage. For example. Storage Profile A collection of rules that identify RAID level and drive types (tiers) on which data is stored. 378 Storage Center 6. Data Progression can then store data with maximum efficiency. Data that has not been accessed for the last 12 progression cycles is gradually migrated down to the lowest tier. to a group or all volumes. Storage Profiles can be applied by default. data that has been accessed within the last four progression cycles is stored on the highest tier. Replay Enabled. and recovery easier and faster. A power supply that includes a battery that will keep Storage Center running in the event of a power outage. Volume A volume is a discrete area of storage striped to multiple hard disks. V View Volume A volume that has been recreated from a previous Replay. or Replication. Dell Compellent 379 . W WWN World Wide Name. After a Replay has been taken of a volume. Virtualization is implemented through the Storage Center controller software. Volume Type Volume Type can be Dynamic. A Replication volume is one that is being Replicated to another Storage Center. Virtual Port Virtual ports eliminate the need for reserve ports. UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply. Power from the battery will last long enough to save data in RAM and shut Storage Center down gracefully. back-up. it becomes Replay Enabled. Virtualization The amalgamation of multiple network storage devices into what appears to be a single storage unit. When operating in Virtual Port Mode.U Unassigned Disk Disk drives that have not been assigned to a managed disk folder and therefore cannot be used by the Storage Center. A volume is dynamic until at least one Replay has been taken of that volume. Virtualization makes tasks such as archiving. all front-end ports accept IO and can be part of one fault domain. Sometimes referred to as an unassigned disk. 3 System Manager Administrator’s Guide .Glossary 380 Storage Center 6. . 680-019-013 A .
Copyright © 2021 DOKUMEN.SITE Inc.